<<

ECHOplatform and Restore Reference Guide

Version 2.2

Document Control Version History Status Changes Date Final. • Software Requirements October 2018. updated. • Executive Summary Report updated.

Copyright © 2003-2018 Barracuda Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. i Table of Contents Table of Figures ...... xv Introduction ...... 1 Audience ...... 1 About This Document ...... 1 Related Documentation ...... 2 Backup Agent Software Requirements ...... 3 Partner Support ...... 4 Part I. Software User Interface ...... 5 Chapter 1. Computer Page Tabs ...... 5 Active Recoveries ...... 6 Activity ...... 6 System Page ...... 7 Editing the System Page ...... 8 Software Page ...... 10 Editing the Software Page ...... 11 Local Vault and Temporary Folder Disabled for Editing When Backup Sets Run ...... 13 About the Custom Backup Installer ...... 14 Creating a Custom Backup Installer ...... 15 Applying a Template to a Single Computer from the Software Page ...... 16 Notifications Page ...... 17 Editing the Notifications Page ...... 19 Backup Selections Page ...... 22 Backup Selections Icons ...... 22 Delete Selections Page ...... 23 Delete Selections Icons ...... 23 Restore Selections Page ...... 23 Restore Selections Icons ...... 24 Chapter 2. Display Features ...... 25 Navigating the Software ...... 25 Expanding and Contracting Page Displays ...... 26

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. ii Drilling Down to Specific Volumes, Folders, and Versions ...... 27 Chapter 3. General Features ...... 29 About Restoring from a Secondary Catalog ...... 29 Restoring from a Secondary Catalog ...... 29 Confirmation Pop-up for Changing Backup Set Names ...... 31 Manual Backup ...... 32 Manually Running a Backup Set ...... 32 Error Handling ...... 33 Chapter 4. Templates ...... 35 About Templates ...... 35 Preferences Templates ...... 36 System Preferences ...... 36 Creating System Preferences Templates ...... 37 Software Preferences ...... 40 Bandwidth Throttling ...... 40 Upload logs ...... 41 Creating a Software Preferences Template ...... 41 Editing Preferences Templates ...... 42 Notification Template ...... 43 Creating an Email Notification Template ...... 43 Assigning Notification ...... 45 Overage Alerts ...... 48 Overage Alerts Overview ...... 48 Enabling Overage Alerts ...... 50 Editing Templates ...... 52 Deleting Templates ...... 54 Applying Templates...... 56 Applying a Template to a Single Computer ...... 56 Applying a Template to a Computer Group ...... 58 Part II. Stray Files ...... 61 Chapter 1. About Stray Files ...... 61

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. iii Stray File Retention ...... 61 Chapter 2. Adding Stray File Preferences Templates ...... 63 Chapter 3. Editing Stray File Templates ...... 67 Chapter 4. Applying Stray File Templates to an Account ...... 69 Chapter 5. Setting Preferences for Stray Files from Computer Page ...... 73 Chapter 6. Changing a Package Plan for an Account with Stray File Settings...... 77 Chapter 7. Stray File Scripts ...... 81 About Administrator Credentials ...... 81 Generating a Stray File List Script ...... 81 Generating a List of the Largest Stray Files to a Specified Path ...... 83 Remotely Generating a Stray File List ...... 84 Scenario ...... 84 Procedure ...... 84 Locally Generating a Stray File List Using .bat File ...... 85 Part III. Reports ...... 87 Chapter 1. Executive Summary Report ...... 87 Executive Summary Report Template ...... 87 Displaying the Executive Summary Report ...... 87 Creating Executive Summary Reports ...... 89 Creating a New Template ...... 89 Using an Existing Template ...... 90 Editing a Template ...... 91 Deleting a Template ...... 92 Creating a Once/Immediately Executive Summary Report ...... 93 Executive Summary Report Details ...... 96 Latest Status of Account Activity ...... 96 Left Side of Report ...... 97 Right Side of Report ...... 98 Report Details ...... 99 Report Content ...... 99 About the Length of Time between Successful Calculation ...... 100

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. iv Report Frequency ...... 100 Account Selection ...... 102 Report Output ...... 102 Chapter 2. User Access Report...... 105 User Access Report Details ...... 105 Viewing the User Access Report ...... 105 Filtering the User Access Report ...... 106 Exporting the User Access Report ...... 107 Chapter 3. Backup Status Report ...... 109 Overview ...... 109 Accessing the Backup Status Report ...... 109 Filtering Backup Status Report Results ...... 109 Backup Status Report Logs ...... 110 Configuring the Backup Status Report ...... 110 Editing Backup Status E- Notifications for Each Computer ...... 113 Adding New Email for the Backup Status Report...... 113 Chapter 4. Miscellaneous Reports ...... 115 Plan Percentage Report ...... 115 Accessing the Plan Percentage Report ...... 115 Accounts History Report ...... 116 Accessing the Accounts History Report ...... 116 Account Snapshot Report ...... 116 Accessing the Account Snapshot Report ...... 117 No Recent Backup Report ...... 117 Accessing the No Recent Backup Report ...... 117 Storage Usage Over Time Report ...... 118 Accessing the Storage Usage Over Time Report ...... 118 Chapter 5. Activity Log ...... 121 About Viewing Activity Logs ...... 121 Viewing Activity Logs at the Home Dashboard ...... 122 Viewing Activity Logs at the Account Page ...... 123

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. v Viewing Activity Logs at the Computer Page ...... 125 Viewing Activity Logs through the Backup Status Report ...... 127 Part IV. Files and Folders Backup and Restore ...... 129 Chapter 1. Files and Folders Backup ...... 129 Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up ...... 129 Viewing All Selected Items ...... 131 Backing Up Files and Folders...... 133 Editing Files and Folders Backup Sets ...... 140 Removing Files and Folders Backup Sets ...... 143 Deleting Files and Folders ...... 144 Deleting by Folder Hierarchy ...... 144 Deleting by Daily Snapshots ...... 144 Deleting by Backup Sets ...... 144 Deleting Stray Files ...... 144 Deleting Files and Folders Backup Data ...... 144 Chapter 2. Files and Folders Restore ...... 149 Overview ...... 149 Folder Hierarchy ...... 149 Daily Snapshots ...... 149 Backup Sets ...... 149 Restoring Files and Folders by Folder Hierarchy ...... 149 Restoring Files and Folders by Daily Snapshots ...... 155 Restoring Files and Folders by Backup Sets ...... 161 Part V. VMware Standard Backup and Restore ...... 169 Chapter 1. VMware Standard Backup ...... 169 VMware Standard Backup Overview ...... 169 vSphere API Configuration ...... 169 Enabling TLS 1.0 on an ESXi 6.5 Host ...... 170 Backing up VMware Standard ...... 170 Editing VMware Standard Backup Sets ...... 179 Removing VMware Standard Backup Sets ...... 181

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. vi Deleting VMware Standard Backup Data ...... 182 VMware Standard Delete Options ...... 185 Chapter 2. VMware Standard Restore ...... 187 Overview ...... 187 VMware Standard Recovery Types ...... 187 Restoring VMware Standard Backup Sets...... 187 Part VI. VMware QuickSpin Backup and Restore ...... 201 Chapter 1. VMware QuickSpin Backup ...... 201 VMware QuickSpin Backup Overview ...... 201 VMware QuickSpin Licensing ...... 201 Backing up VMware QuickSpin ...... 201 Editing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets ...... 218 Changing a VMware QuickSpin Destination Host ...... 220 Changing a VMware QuickSpin Incremental Version Storage Location ...... 222 Removing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets ...... 224 Deleting VMware QuickSpin Backup Data ...... 225 Chapter 2. VMware QuickSpin Restore ...... 229 Overview ...... 229 VMware Standard Recovery Types ...... 229 Restoring VMware QuickSpin ...... 229 Part VII. SQL Backup and Restore ...... 237 Chapter 1. SQL Server Backup ...... 237 Backing up a SQL Server ...... 237 Editing SQL Server Backup Sets ...... 246 Removing SQL Server Backup Sets ...... 249 Deleting SQL Server Backup Data ...... 250 Chapter 2. Restoring a SQL Server Backup ...... 253 Part VIII. Physical Imaging Standard Backup and Restore ...... 259 Chapter 1. Physical Imaging Standard Backup ...... 259 Physical Imaging Standard Backup Overview ...... 259 Creating Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets ...... 260

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. vii Editing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets ...... 270 Removing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets ...... 273 Deleting Physical Imaging Standard Revisions ...... 274 Physical Imaging Standard Delete Options ...... 277 Retain Backup Data for 7 Days ...... 277 Delete All Deduplication Data ...... 277 Chapter 2. Physical Imaging Standard Restores ...... 279 Restoring to VHD/X Files ...... 279 Overview ...... 279 Restore Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files ...... 279 Restoring to Hyper-V Virtual Machine ...... 284 Overview ...... 284 Restore to a Hyper-V Virtual Machine ...... 284 Restoring via Bare Metal Recovery ...... 292 Overview ...... 292 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File ...... 293 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive ...... 298 Running Recovery Media ...... 302 Adding Missing Drivers ...... 307 Part IX. Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup and Restore ...... 309 Chapter 1. Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup ...... 309 Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Overview ...... 309 Creating Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backups ...... 310 Editing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets...... 318 Removing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets...... 321 Deleting Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Data ...... 323 Chapter 2. Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Restore ...... 327 Rapid Recovery ...... 327 Rapid Recovery Restore Overview ...... 327 Managing Rapid Recoveries ...... 327 Rapid Recovery Restore ...... 331

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. viii Restoring to VHD/X Files ...... 339 Overview ...... 339 Restoring Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files ...... 339 Object-level Restore...... 344 Object-level Restore Overview ...... 344 Restoring at the Object-level ...... 345 Restoring via Bare Metal Recovery ...... 350 Overview ...... 350 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File ...... 351 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive ...... 357 Running Recovery Media ...... 361 Adding Missing Drivers ...... 366 Part X. Hyper-V Standard Backup and Restore ...... 369 Chapter 1. Hyper-V Standard Backup ...... 369 Hyper-V Standard Backup Overview ...... 369 Creating Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets ...... 370 Editing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets ...... 378 Removing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets ...... 381 Deleting Hyper-V Standard Revisions ...... 382 Hyper-V Standard Delete Options ...... 385 Retain Backup Data for 7 Days ...... 385 Delete All Deduplication Data ...... 385 Chapter 2. Hyper-V Standard Restore ...... 387 Overview ...... 387 About Restoring to a Folder ...... 387 Hyper-V Manager Virtual Machines Import Options ...... 387 Backup States of Imported VMs ...... 388 Hyper-V Replication ...... 388 Managing an Active Recovery ...... 389 Restoring Hyper-V Standard Backups ...... 390 Part XI. Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup and Restore ...... 395

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. ix Chapter 1. Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup ...... 395 Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Overview ...... 395 Creating Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets...... 396 Editing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets ...... 403 Removing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets ...... 406 Deleting Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Revisions ...... 407 Chapter 2. Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Restore ...... 411 Overview ...... 411 Rapid Recovery – Recovery-in-Place ...... 411 Rapid Recovery – Object-level Recovery ...... 411 Copy-mode Recovery ...... 411 Restoring Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backups ...... 412 Restoring Hyper-V Object-level Rapid Recovery ...... 416 Part XII. Exchange Mailbox Level Backup and Restore ...... 421 Chapter 1. Exchange Mailbox Level Backup ...... 421 Exchange Mailbox Level Overview ...... 421 Exchange Mailbox Level Features ...... 421 Exchange Mailbox Level Known Issues ...... 422 Exchange Mailbox Level Settings ...... 423 Creating Exchange Mailbox Level Backups ...... 423 Editing Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Sets...... 429 Removing Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Sets ...... 432 Deleting Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Data ...... 433 Chapter 2. Restoring Exchange Mailbox Level Backups ...... 437 Part XIII. Exchange Information Store Backup and Restore ...... 441 Chapter 1. Exchange Information Store Backup ...... 441 Creating Exchange Information Store Backups ...... 441 Editing Exchange Information Store Backup Sets ...... 448 Removing Exchange Information Store Backup Sets ...... 451 Deleting Exchange Information Store Backup Data ...... 452 Chapter 2. Restoring Exchange Information Store ...... 455

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. x Part XIV. System State Backup and Restore...... 459 Chapter 1. System State Backup ...... 459 Creating System State Backups ...... 459 Editing System State Backup Sets ...... 464 Removing System State Backup Sets ...... 466 Deleting System State Data ...... 467 Chapter 2. Restoring System State ...... 469 Part XV. Partner Pricing ...... 473 Chapter 1. Minimum Commitment Levels ...... 473 Minimum Commitment Based on Amount instead of Number/Types of Packages ...... 473 Commitment Shortfall Status ...... 473 Viewing Shortfall Status from the Manage Account/Packages Page...... 474 Viewing Estimated Billing and Invoice Shortfall Status ...... 475 Chapter 2. Volume Pricing ...... 477 About Volume Pricing ...... 477 Storage Management ...... 477 Chapter 3. Package Pricing ...... 479 U2 Plan ...... 479 Package Pricing Model ...... 479 Adding a Partner ...... 481 Manage Accounts/Packages Link ...... 482 The Manage Accounts/Packages Page...... 483 Manage Accounts/Packages Page Description ...... 483 Viewing Account Billing Plan Details ...... 484 Viewing Extra Costs Information ...... 485 Exporting Accounts/Packages to a .CSV File ...... 485 Custom Packages Billing Plans ...... 486 Creating a Custom Package Billing Plan ...... 486 Editing a Subpartner Custom Package Billing Plan ...... 489 Deactivating a Custom Package Billing Plan ...... 491 Assigning Packages ...... 493

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xi Assignment Process ...... 493 Assigning Packages to Subpartner Accounts ...... 493 Assigning Packages to New Accounts ...... 496 Assigning Packages to Existing Accounts ...... 497 Migrating Existing Accounts to Package Pricing from Volume Pricing ...... 498 Package Invoice Description ...... 500 Account Snapshot Report ...... 501 Chapter 4. Annual Prepay Plan ...... 503 About the Annual Prepay Plan ...... 503 Cost and Discount Information ...... 503 Additional Costs Line ...... 503 Displaying Additional Costs for an Account ...... 503 Additional Discounts Line...... 504 Displaying Additional Discounts for an Account ...... 504 Annual Prepay Plan Invoice Information ...... 505 Part XVI. BILLING ...... 509 Chapter 1. Account Billing ...... 509 Creating an Account Billing Plan ...... 509 Assigning a Plan to a Partner ...... 512 Changing an Account Billing Plan ...... 513 Editing an Account Billing Plan ...... 514 Deleting an Account Billing Plan ...... 516 Viewing Current Monthly Account Billing Information ...... 518 Viewing Account Billing Plan Information...... 519 Package Invoice Description ...... 520 Account Snapshot Report ...... 521 Chapter 2. DPaaS Billing ...... 523 DPaaS Account Commitment ...... 523 Viewing DPaaS Commitment Status from the Manage Accounts/Packages Page ...... 523 Viewing Estimated Billing and Invoice DPaaS Commitment Status ...... 525 Part XVII. Contacting Partner Support ...... 529

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xii How and When to Contact Partner Support ...... 529 Common Issues You Can Check ...... 529 Preparing for Support ...... 529 Part XVIII. Appendix ...... 531 Navigating to the Computer Page ...... 531 Searching for an Account ...... 533 Refining Your Search ...... 534 Cancelling a Search ...... 534 Browsing to a Folder ...... 535 Adding a Network Location ...... 535 Changing Backup Set Names ...... 536 Changing Cloud Backup to Local Only Backup ...... 537 Canceling Options ...... 537 Backup Options ...... 538 Online Only ...... 538 Local Only ...... 538 Online and Local ...... 538 Archiving Rules ...... 539 Setting Archiving Rules...... 539 How Archiving Rules Work ...... 539 Advanced Archiving Retention Parameters ...... 540 Advanced Archiving Rules Templates ...... 541 Setting Advanced Archiving Rules for Files and Folders ...... 543 Backup Schedules...... 545 By the Minute and Hourly Recurrences ...... 546 Daily and Weekly...... 547 Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule ...... 549 Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules ...... 549 VMware Clusters ...... 549 High Availability ...... 550 Sharing of Resources ...... 550

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xiii vMotion ...... 550 About the Backup Monitor ...... 550 Routine Tasks ...... 550 Re-installation Tasks ...... 550 Re-installation Procedure ...... 551 About Groups ...... 557 Creating a Group ...... 557 Editing a Group ...... 558 Glossary ...... 559 Index...... 563

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xiv

Table of Figures Figure 1.Computer Page Tabs...... 5 Figure 2. Active Recoveries Page...... 6 Figure 3. Activity Page...... 6 Figure 4. System Page...... 7 Figure 5. Software Page...... 11 Figure 6. Notifications Page...... 18 Figure 7. Backup Selections Page...... 22 Figure 8. Delete Selections Page...... 23 Figure 9. Restore Selections Page...... 23 Figure 10. Files and Folders Tab Feature...... 25 Figure 11. Page Display Feature...... 26 Figure 12. Selection Arrow...... 27 Figure 13. Manual Backup...... 32 Figure 14. Error Display...... 33 Figure 15. Manage Templates Page...... 35 Figure 16. Overage Alerts Tab...... 49 Figure 17. Sample Overage Email Notification...... 50 Figure 18. Stray File Retention Options...... 62 Figure 19. StrayfileList Command...... 82 Figure 20. CSV Stray File List...... 83 Figure 21. Remote StrayFileList Command...... 85 Figure 22. Executive Summary Report...... 96 Figure 23. Left Side of Report...... 97 Figure 24. Right Side of Report...... 98 Figure 25. Report Content Section...... 99 Figure 26. Once/Immediately Report Schedule...... 100 Figure 27. Daily Report Template...... 101 Figure 28. Weekly Report Template...... 101 Figure 29. Monthly Report Template...... 101 Figure 30. Accounts Selection...... 102 Figure 31. Report Output...... 103 Figure 32. User Access Report...... 106 Figure 33. Plan Percentage Report...... 115 Figure 34. Accounts History Report...... 116 Figure 35. Account Snapshot Report...... 117 Figure 36. No Recent Backup Report...... 118 Figure 37. Storage Usage Over Time Report...... 119

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xv Figure 38. Activity Log...... 121 Figure 39. View All Selected Items Pop-up...... 130 Figure 40. Package Pricing Support for Partners...... 480 Figure 41. The Manage Accounts/Packages Link...... 482 Figure 42. Backup Package Information...... 482 Figure 43. The Manage Accounts/Packages Page...... 483 Figure 44. Example of .CSV File...... 485 Figure 45. Package Billing for Partners Invoice that Includes Subpartners...... 501 Figure 46. Account Snapshot Report...... 501 Figure 47. Additional Costs Information...... 504 Figure 48. Additional Discounts Information...... 505 Figure 49. Prepaid Discount Invoice Line Item ...... 506 Figure 50. Non-renewal Invoice...... 507 Figure 51. Package Invoice...... 520 Figure 52. Account Snapshot Report...... 521 Figure 53. Snapshot Report (continued)...... 521 Figure 54. Account Navigation Aid...... 533 Figure 55. Search Results...... 534 Figure 56. Cancelation Options...... 537 Figure 57. Advanced Archiving Rules Settings...... 539

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xvi

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. xvii INTRODUCTION This chapter includes the following topics:

• Audience • About This Document • Related Documentation • Backup Agent Software Requirements • Partner Support

Audience This document is intended for IT professionals and partners providing their clients with Barracuda MSP ECHOplatform cloud backup and recovery support.

About This Document The purpose of this document is to serve as a repository for the Barracuda Backup and Restore features that have been implemented in previous releases.

This Reference Guide provides the following information:

Part Contents Introduction Information about this release and this document. 1 Software User Interface. 2 Stray Files 3 Reports 4 Files and Folders Backup and Restore 5 VMware Standard Backup and Restore 6 VMware QuickSpin Backup and Restore 7 SQL Server Backup and Restore 8 Physical Imaging Standard Backup and Restore 9 Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup and Restore 10 Hyper-V Standard Backup and Restore 11 Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup and Restore 12 Exchange Mailbox Level Backup and Restore 13 Exchange Information Store Backup and Restore 14 System State Backup and Restore 15 Partner Pricing

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 1 Part Contents 16 Billing 17 Contacting Partner Support 18 Appendix

Related Documentation The following documentation is available:

• ECHOplatform Best Practices Partner Guide - provides details on best practices for performing backups and restores. • ECHOplatform Quick Start Partner Guide - provides information about setting your preferences, creating templates, and installing the software. • ECHOplatform Hyper-V 2016 Backup and Restore User Guide v5.8.2 - provides information about deploying and using Hyper-V 2016 Standard and Rapid Recovery. • ECHOplatform - Autotask Integration Guide - provides information about setting up Autotask integration with the Backup agent. • ECHOplatform - ConnectWise Integration Guide - provides information about setting up ConnectWise integration with the backup agent.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 2 Backup Agent Software Requirements The following table provides the requirements for running the backup agent software.

Backup Agent Software Requirements Supported Operating Systems Minimum Requirements for File and Folder • MS SP2/2008 R2 SP1, Backups SP2/2012/2012 R2/2012 R2 Essentials/2016 • 2 GHz dual-core CPU • MS SP1/8.0/8.1/10 • 1 GB of total RAM (500 MB free RAM during • MS Windows Small Business Server 2011 backup, restore, or delete operation) SP1 • Free disk space equaling twice the size of your largest protected file (not required for VM backups) Physical Imaging and BMR Supported • Broadband Internet Connection Operating Systems • MS.NET Framework 4.5.2 • MS Windows 7.0 (SHA2 is required)/8.1/10 • MS Windows Server 2008 SP2 (Rapid Minimum Requirements for Exchange, SQL, Recovery only, Standard is not Imaging, VMware, and Hyper-V Backups supported)/2008 R2 SP1 (SHA2 is • 2GHz quad-core CPU required)/2012/2012 R2/2012 R2 • 4 GB of Total RAM (1 GB free RAM during Essentials/2016 backup, restore, or delete operation) • MS Windows Small Business Server 2011 • Free disk space equaling twice the size of your SP1 largest protected file (not required for VM backups) BMR Support • Broadband Internet Connection • MS.NET Framework 4.5.2 (to allow • Hard Disk Controllers backup/restore/delete management from the  SCSI web)  IDE  SATA Exchange • Boot Types/Disk Partition Styles • MS Exchange 2010/2010 SP1, SP2/2013/2013  MBR SP1/2016 (when installed on Windows Server  GPT 2008 R2 with SP2/2012 Standard Editions or • Supported File Systems (for backup source) Small Business Server 2011. Does not support  NTFS (Unless it is a System volume DAG or clustered environments.) that is part of the Boot Volumes group.) SQL • Supported Backup Destinations • SQL 2008/2012/2014/2017 Standard Edition  512-byte sector disks • SQL Servers must be running in simple  4K native sector disks recovery mode

Web Portal Requirements • Chrome (most recent version) • Edge (most recent version) • 10/11 (desktop mode) • Firefox (most recent version) Virtual Machines

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 3 Backup Agent Software Requirements • VMware ESXi/vCenter 5.5/6.0/6.1/6.5/6.7 • All supported VMware versions require VMware Essentials license or higher. Includes support for clustered environments. • Hyper-V 2016/2012 R2/2012/2008 R2 (does not include clustered support) • Windows Server 2012 R2 Essentials is not supported as a virtualization host

Partner Support Partner Support is available 8 AM to 9 PM (EST). Phone: 800-569-0155, option 1 or 617-948-5300 Email: [email protected] You also can use the live chat service 8 AM to 6 PM (EST). Click the following link: Link: http://www.barracudamsp.com/support/contact.php

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 4 PART I. SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE This part includes the following chapters:

• Computer Page Tabs • Display Features • General Features • Templates

Chapter 1. Computer Page Tabs This chapter provides a description for each page that can be accessed through the Computer page tabs. The following tabs are displayed on the Computer page:

• Active Recoveries • Activity • System Page • Software Page • Notifications Page • Backup Selections Page • Delete Selections Page • Restore Selections Page

Figure 1 provides a display of the Computer page tabs.

Figure 1.Computer Page Tabs.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 5 Active Recoveries The Active Recoveries page allows you to view a list of the active recovery VMs running in the portal, so you can determine when a recovery VM is running.

Figure 2 provides a display of the Active Recoveries page.

Figure 2. Active Recoveries Page. Activity The Activity page allows you to view a summary of previous backups, drill down to the log to view the status and export a CSV file of the log.

Figure 3 provides a display of the Activity page.

Figure 3. Activity Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 6 The following table provides a description of the columns displayed in the Activity tab.

Column Description Computer (ID) Displays computer name and ID. Links to the Computer Details page. Detailed Event Logs Displays an icon that links you to the Detailed Event Logs. Start Date Displays start time date and time and represents the start time from the perspective of the agent running the backup. Results Displays backup and restore activity results. Status The status of each backup is represented by an icon where: • Red = failed • yellow = warning • green = running • gray = completed

System Page The System page allows you to specify computer-specific settings to determine how the agent on the local computer behaves. To specify settings for multiple computers, see Templates. The System page allows you to specify how:

• Many items are backed up or restored at the same time. • Many times, a file should be retried if it fails to back up. • To exclude items from backup sets. • To manage Stray Files.

Figure 4 provides a display of the System page.

Figure 4. System Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 7 Editing the System Page To edit the System page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the System tab.

The System page is displayed.

2. Click the Edit button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 8 The fields are enabled.

3. At the Concurrent Workers section, specify how many VMs are backed up or restored at the same time.

Note: Increasing this value may improve the performance of these operations but may consume more resources on this computer.

4. At the File Retries section, specify how many times a file should be retried if it fails to back up.

Note: The default setting is 1.

5. At the Wildcard Exclusions section, set wildcard exclusions to exclude items from backup sets.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 9 Note: Separate each phrase with commas. Commit each phrase by pressing Enter. Example: The following is an example of committed wildcard exclusions.

6. At the Stray File Retention section, optionally select the following:

Note: The last two options are enabled only when the first item is selected.

• Automatically remove stray files after x days. Note: The default is 90 days. • Skip file removal if volume or share is not found. • Always keep the most recent copy of each file.

Definition: Stray files are any backed-up files that have been removed from the local machine, the backup set or excluded above. See Stray Files for details.

7. When you have completed your selections, click the Save button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

8. Click Yes.

The new settings are displayed.

Software Page The Software page is where you can specify computer-specific settings that determine how the backup agent on the local computer behaves. To specify settings for multiple computers, see Templates. The Software page allows you to do the following:

• Specify a temporary folder. • Disable or synchronize the Local Vault folder with the remote servers. • Set bandwidth throttling limits. • Upload warning and error logs for online viewing. • Create a backup installer • Apply templates

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 10 Figure 5 provides a display of the Software page.

Figure 5. Software Page.

Editing the Software Page To edit the Software page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Software tab.

The Software page is displayed.

2. Click the Edit button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 11 The fields are displayed.

3. At the Temporary Folder section, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder. See Browsing to a Folder. 4. At the Local Vault section, optionally select the Enable the Local Vault check box. Definition: The Local Vault is where local copies and local-only data are saved.

a. If enabled, click the Browse button to locate the Local Vault. See Browsing to a Folder. b. Optionally, select one of the following check boxes.

• Sync the Local Vault folder with the remote servers. Note: Any data backed up to the remote servers while the Local Vault is unavailable is downloaded to the Local Vault in the background once it is made available. • Backup directly to the Local Vault first. Note: All data is uploaded to the remote server in the background. This option is designed for businesses with low bandwidth and smaller backup sets as it only uses one thread to upload to the cloud to ensure low bandwidth utilization.

c. Select from 1 to 5 items to process concurrently when synchronizing the Local Vault folder with the remote servers.

5. At the Bandwidth Throttling section, optionally select the Limit bandwidth usage radio button.

The usage fields are enabled.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 12 6. Set the usage limits.

Note: The default setting is Sunday through Sunday from 12 AM to 12 AM with a limit of 64 Kb/s.

7. At the Upload Logs section, optionally select the Automatically upload logs for online viewing check box.

Note: This option uploads warning and error log entries to enable online viewing.

8. When you have completed your selections, click the Save button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

9. Click Yes.

The new settings are displayed.

Local Vault and Temporary Folder Disabled for Editing When Backup Sets Run At the Software page, you cannot make edits to the settings for the Temporary Folder or the Local Vault if the backup set is running.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 13 If a backup set is running, the following message is displayed on the page.

About the Custom Backup Installer You can create a custom installer file that allows the software to self-install with the proper username, and Computer ID. This option also allows you to configure the backup agent’s settings from the Management Portal.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 14 Creating a Custom Backup Installer To create a custom backup installer, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Software tab.

The Software page is displayed.

2. Click the Create Installer button.

The Installer Created pop-up is displayed.

3. Copy and paste the link or email it to the contact for this computer, and then click OK. 4. Run the installer.

The Setup Wizard is displayed. See Installing the Backup Agent Software in the ECHOplatform Quick Start Partner Guide for procedure.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 15 Applying a Template to a Single Computer from the Software Page To apply a template to a single computer, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Software tab.

The Software page is displayed.

2. Click the Apply Template button.

The Apply Template pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 16 3. Select the desired template from the drop-down menus, and then click Apply.

• If applying Preferences templates, the changes are applied to the selected Agent the next time the Agent checks in. The Agent checks in every 15 minutes. • Note that a Pending status for a Preference template is displayed on the Computers section of the Manage Account page until the template is applied, as shown below.

• If applying Notifications templates and/or Overage Alerts templates, the Append pop-up is displayed, as shown below.

• Append adds settings not already specified (good for modifying notifications settings). • Replace overwrites all settings with exactly what was chosen in the template (good for resetting or clearing notifications settings).

4. Click Append or Replace.

The new email notifications are added or replaced. See Templates for more information.

Notifications Page The Notifications page allows you to assign backup notifications for various backup outcomes to be sent to any number of email addresses. To specify notifications for multiple computers, see Templates. The Notifications page allows you to do the following:

• Specify what email addresses that receive backup notifications and define the report criteria. • Customize the content of the Backup Complete, Backup Warning and Backup Failed notifications. • Control how often you receive notifications that a backup set has not run. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 17 • Set how long a backup set can run before sending an email notification and specify how often to send the email notification. • Control email notifications for VMware QuickSpin, Imaging, and Files & Folders backup sets that are using recurring-interval schedules. • Specify how many times (1-25) these same backup sets using recurring-interval schedules must fail consecutively before receiving a notification.

Figure 6 provides a display of the Notifications page.

Figure 6. Notifications Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 18 Editing the Notifications Page To edit the Notifications page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Notifications tab.

The Notifications page is displayed.

2. To add email recipients and select the events with which to notify them, click the Edit Emails button.

The Emails template is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 19 3. To add email recipients, click the Add Extra Email button.

A new field is displayed.

4. At the new field, type the email address, and then select the event checkboxes with which to

notify the recipients. To remove the field, click the remove icon. 5. After completing your selections, click the Save button.

The Notification page is displayed with the new email recipients, as shown below.

6. To assign notification settings, click the Edit Settings button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 20 The settings fields are enabled.

7. Make your edits, and then click the Save button.

The Notification page is displayed with the new settings.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 21 Backup Selections Page Figure 7 provides a display of the Backup Selections page.

Figure 7. Backup Selections Page.

Backup Selections Icons The following table provides descriptions of the Backup Selections page icons.

Icon Description Add a new backup selection.

Edit the backup selection.

Run the backup selection.

A backup is scheduled.

A backup is not scheduled.

Manual backup running with option to cancel.

Remove backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 22 Delete Selections Page Figure 8 provides a display of the Delete Selections page.

Figure 8. Delete Selections Page.

Delete Selections Icons The following table provides descriptions of the Delete Selections page icons.

Icon Description Manually delete the respective Delete selection.

Currently deleting.

Stop action.

Filter the displayed column items.

Restore Selections Page Figure 9 provides a display of the Restore Selections page.

Figure 9. Restore Selections Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 23 Restore Selections Icons The following table provides descriptions of the Restore Selections page icons.

Icon Description Manually configure the respective Restore selection.

Currently restoring.

Stop action.

Filter the displayed column items.

Locate a secondary catalog. See Restoring from a Secondary Catalog. Download and create Bare-Metal Restore media creator.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 24 Chapter 2. Display Features This chapter includes the following topics:

• Navigating the Software • Expanding and Contracting Page Displays • Drilling Down to Specific Volumes, Folders, and Versions

Navigating the Software There are two ways to navigate in the software: linearly by clicking the Next button or selecting the tabs.

First time users may want to use the button that is displayed on most pages, which allows you to experience the full functionality of the software to become familiar with all the features. More experienced users may want to navigate by using the tabs to make modifications to only some of the default settings. Tab features are specific to backup and restore types and therefore vary in their display. This guide addresses these types of differences in their respective sections. For instance, Figure 10 provides an example of the tabs that display when performing a Files and Folders backup.

Figure 10. Files and Folders Tab Feature.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 25 Expanding and Contracting Page Displays Many of the software pages allow you to expand and contract page views. By clicking the expand/contract arrows as shown in Figure 11, you can modify the page display. This feature is particularly helpful when drilling down to select specific files.

Figure 11. Page Display Feature.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 26 Drilling Down to Specific Volumes, Folders, and Versions

The arrow at the right of the displayed items indicates that there are files and folders, volumes, and/or versions under that folder that can be displayed, as shown in Figure 12. Note: The grayed-out items indicate that the item may be included in another backup set, or for some other reason.

Figure 12. Selection Arrow.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 27

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 28 Chapter 3. General Features This chapter includes the following topics:

• About Restoring from a Secondary Catalog • Confirmation Pop-up for Changing Backup Set Names • Manual Backup • Error Handling

About Restoring from a Secondary Catalog There may be occasions when you want to restore from a secondary catalog using a restore drive. For example:

• Bandwidth limitations restrict restoring a large amount of data • A primary catalog is corrupt

You can request a restore drive of your data instead of restoring over the Internet by contacting Partner Support. See Partner Support.

When the restore drive arrives, use the secondary catalog option to perform the restore.

Restoring from a Secondary Catalog To restore from a secondary catalog, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 29 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Viewing Original Catalog.

The Catalog menu options are displayed.

4. Select Restore from a Secondary Catalog.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 30 The catalog selection pop-up is displayed.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

5. Select the catalog file, and then click OK. 6. Refer to the restore procedures in this guide.

Confirmation Pop-up for Changing Backup Set Names If you did not change the default backup set name when creating a new backup set, the following confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set if you desire. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed. See Changing Backup Set Names for instructions on how to change the backup set name.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 31 Manual Backup At the Backup Selections page, you can run a manual backup at any time. Figure 13 shows a backup running with no schedule that can be run manually. You can also run a manual backup that has a schedule.

Figure 13. Manual Backup.

The backup running and stop icons are displayed while the backup is running.

Manually Running a Backup Set To run a backup manually, perform the following steps.

1. At the Backup Selections page, click the blue play button in the Run column.

Depending on the backup type, the run Full or Incremental pop up is displayed.

2. Make your selection, and then click Continue.

The backup begins to run, and status is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 32 Error Handling When creating, editing, or restoring a backup set, if an error is found, a prompt is displayed asking if you would like to correct or ignore the error. The error message specifically lets you know how to correct it. In addition, a red exclamation point is displayed on the tab of the known error location. Figure 14 provides an example where errors occurred, and the corresponding error message.

Figure 14. Error Display.

Clicking Fix Now displays the first page where the error occurred.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 33

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 34 Chapter 4. Templates This section includes the following sections:

• About Templates • Preferences Templates • Notification Templates • Overage Alerts • Editing Templates • Deleting Templates • Applying Templates

About Templates Templates are predefined groups of preferences, alerts, and notifications settings that can be applied to a computer or group of computers at one time. You can create the following templates:

• System Preferences • Software Preferences • Notifications • Overage alerts

Newly applied templates overwrite any existing preferences, notifications settings, or overage alerts. Figure 15 provides a display of the Manage Templates page.

Figure 15. Manage Templates Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 35 Preferences Templates With preferences templates, you can set

• System preferences • Software preferences

Applying a preferences template requires the backup agent to be connected and may take up to 15 minutes during which a pending message is displayed on the Computer section of the Manage Account page.

System Preferences Under the System Preferences tab, you can configure the following options:

• Concurrent Workers • File Retries • Wildcard Exclusions • Stray File Retention

Concurrent Workers This option allows you to determine how many files and VMs the software can back up, restore, or delete at the same time. Increasing this value may improve the performance of these operations but may consume more resources on the computer.

File Retries This option allows you to determine how often a file can be retried if it fails to back up.

Wildcard Exclusions This option allows you to set wildcat exclusions to add to each computer’s exclusion list. Each phrase must be separated by a comma and committed by pressing Enter.

Stray File Retention This option allows you to set the following retention rules:

• Automatically remove stray files after a set number of days. • Skip file removal if the volume or the share is not found.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 36 Creating System Preferences Templates Note: By leaving a preference setting unselected, the template, when applied, does not overwrite that setting for the computer. Example: If you create a template that adjusts only the Bandwidth Throttling setting, the other settings are not overwritten by this template. To create a System Preferences template, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

The Manage Templates page is displayed.

3. Click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences page is displayed.

4. Click the Add Template tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 37 The System Preferences template is displayed.

5. Click the edit icon to display the Template name field, as shown below.

The Template name field is displayed.

6. Type a unique template name, and then click the confirm icon.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 38 The new template name is displayed.

7. At the Concurrent Workers section, click the check box.

The fields are enabled.

8. Click the arrows to specify how many items are backed up or restored at the same time.

Note: Increasing the value may improve the performance of these operations but may consume more resources on the computer. The following table provides the default settings.

Item Concurrent Workers Default Setting Files 3 Hyper-V 3 VMware 3 Mailbox backups 1 Performance Workers (Physical 3 Imaging Standard Only)

9. At the File Retries section, click the check box.

The fields are enabled.

10. Click the arrows to specify how many times a file should be retried if it fails to back up.

Note: The default setting is 1.

11. At the Wildcard Exclusions section, click the check box.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 39 The fields are enabled.

12. Set wildcard exclusions to exclude items from the backup sets.

Note: Separate each phrase with commas. Commit each phrase by pressing Enter. Example: The following is an example of committed wildcard exclusions.

13. At the Stray File Retention section, click the check box.

The fields are enabled.

14. Optionally select the following:

• Automatically remove stray files after x days. Note: The default is 90 days. • Skip file removal if volume or share is not found. • Always keep the most recent copy of each file.

Note: The last two options are enabled only when the first item is selected. Definition: Stray files are any backed-up files that have been removed from the local machine, the backup set or excluded above.

Software Preferences Under the Software Preferences tab, you can configure the following options:

• Bandwidth Throttling • Upload logs

Bandwidth Throttling This option allows you to set the bandwidth usage limits and times, or to deselect limits.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 40 Upload logs This option allows you to upload warning and error log entries to enable online viewing.

Creating a Software Preferences Template 1. To configure software preferences, click the Software tab.

The Software Preferences page is displayed.

2. Click the Bandwidth Throttling check box

The fields are enabled.

3. Select the Limit bandwidth usage or the Do not limit bandwidth usage radio button. 4. If Limit bandwidth usage is enabled, set the usage limits.

Note: The default setting is Sunday through Sunday from 12 AM to 12 AM with a limit of 64 Kb/s.

5. Click the Upload Logs check box.

The check box is enabled. Note: This option uploads warning and error log entries to enable online viewing.

6. Optionally, clear the Automatically upload logs for online viewing check box. 7. When you have completed your selections, click the Save button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

8. Click Yes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 41 The Preferences template is displayed.

You can now apply the template to a single computer or a group of computers. See Applying Templates.

Editing Preferences Templates To edit a Preferences template, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

The Manage Templates page is displayed.

3. Click the Preferences tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 42 The Preferences page is displayed.

4. Click the edit icon beside the template you want to modify.

The template is displayed.

5. Select the System or Software tab, make edits, and then click Update.

Notification Template This chapter includes the following topics:

• Creating an Email Notification Template • Assigning Notification Settings

Creating an Email Notification Template To create an Email Notification template, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 43 The Manage Templates page is displayed with Notifications as the default view.

3. Click the Add Template button.

The Add Template page is displayed.

4. To add a new template name, click the existing template name, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 44 The name field is displayed.

5. Type a template name, and then click the check mark icon. 6. Click the Add Main Email button.

The Main Email check box notification options are displayed.

7. Select the check box for each notification you want emailed. 8. To add additional emails, click the Add Extra Email button.

The extra email text box is displayed.

9. Make your selections, and then click Save.

The Notifications template is displayed as shown below.

Assigning Notification Settings To assign notification settings, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 45 The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

The Manage Templates page is displayed with Notifications as the default view.

3. Click the Add Template button.

The Add Template page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 46 4. Click the Settings tab.

The settings template is displayed.

5. At the Notification Preferences section, optionally clear the Include Failed Items and/or the Include No Files Notice check boxes. 6. At the No Recent Backups section, optionally control how often you receive notifications that a backup set has not run. 7. At the Backup Runtime section, optionally set how long a backup set can run before sending an email notification and specify how often to send the email notification. 8. At the Recurring-Interval Scheduled Backups section, optionally control email notifications for VMware QuickSpin, Images, and Files & Folders backup sets that are using recurring-interval schedules. 9. Specify how many times (1-25) backup sets using recurring-interval schedules must fail consecutively before receiving a notification. 10. After completing your selections, click the Save button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 47 The Notifications template is displayed.

You can now apply the template to a single computer or a group of computers. See Applying Templates.

Overage Alerts This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overage Alerts Overview • Enabling Overage Alerts

Overage Alerts Overview The overage alert notifies you when online usage is at, near, or over the account-billing plan. This email feature is triggered at a billing percentage that you set. By being alerted before receiving an invoice, your client has time to adjust their usage, or perhaps upgrade their plan.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 48 The Overage Alerts tab is displayed on the Account Information page, as shown in Figure 16.

Figure 16. Overage Alerts Tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 49 Figure 17 provides a sample of the overage email notification.

Figure 17. Sample Overage Email Notification.

Enabling Overage Alerts To enable overage alerts, perform the following steps. 1. At the Manage Account Information page, click the Alerts tab.

The Overage Alerts pane is displayed.

Note that the Enabled status is set to No.

2. Click the Overusage Alert link.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 50 The Alerts page is displayed with the default account email address displayed.

3. Click the Enable Notification check box, and then click Save. 4. To send alerts to other recipients with modified billing plan percentages and/or time between alerts, click the Add Extra Email button.

The additional email field is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 51 5. Type the email, click the Enable Notification check box, and optionally overwrite the numbers in the % of Billing and Time Between Alerts fields.

Note: The % of Billing Plan ranges from 1 to 200%. The Time between Alerts ranges from 1 to 31 days.

6. If you want the email recipient to receive the same alert notifications as the previous, click the add

button at the right of the email field.

The email field is displayed.

7. To delete an email, click the red x button.

Note: If you click the red x of the top email address in a section, you are prompted to delete all email addresses for that section.

8. To save changes, click Save.

You are returned to the Account Information page. Note that the Enabled status is set to Yes.

Editing Templates To edit templates, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, select Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 52 The Manage Template page is displayed.

3. Select the Notifications, Preferences, or the Overage Alerts tab.

The Notification templates are displayed in the example below.

4. Click the edit icon beside the template you want to modify.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 53 The Edit Template page is displayed. Example: The Notification options are displayed in the example below.

5. Make edits, and then click Update.

Deleting Templates To delete templates, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, select Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 54 The Manage Templates page is displayed.

3. Select the Notifications, Preferences, or the Overage Alerts tab.

The Notification templates are displayed in the example below.

4. Click the delete icon to the right of the template you want to delete.

The Delete Template prompt is displayed.

5. Click Yes.

The template is deleted.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 55 Applying Templates Templates can be applied to a single computer or applied to a group of computers. A template may be applied from Apply Template tabs located on the following pages:

• Management Dashboard under both the Accounts View and Group View tabs • Manage Account page under the Computers tab. • Computer page under the Software tab.

Applying a Template to a Single Computer To apply a template to a single computer, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, display a partner’s accounts/computers by clicking the expand

arrow to its left, and then click the specific account/computer, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 56 The Manage Account page is displayed.

2. Click the Apply Template tab.

The Apply Template pop-up is displayed.

3. Select the desired templates from the drop-down menus, and then click Apply.

• If applying Preferences templates and/or Overage Alerts templates, the changes are applied to the selected Agent the next time the Agent checks in. Agents that are running check-in every 15 minutes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 57 • Note that a Pending status is displayed on the Computer section of the Manage Account page until the template is applied, as shown below.

• If applying Notifications templates, the Append pop-up is displayed, as shown below.

• Append adds settings not already specified (good for modifying notifications settings). • Replace overwrites all settings with exactly what was chosen in the template (good for resetting or clearing notifications settings).

4. Click Append or Replace.

The emails are added or replaced.

Applying a Template to a Computer Group To apply a template to a computer group, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, select the Group View tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 58 The groups are displayed.

2. Click a specific group row to highlight it.

The Apply Template tab is displayed, as shown below.

3. Click the Apply Template tab.

The Apply Template pop-up is displayed.

4. Select the desired templates from the drop-down menus, and then click Apply.

• If applying Preferences templates, the changes are applied to the selected Agent the next time the Agent checks in. Agents that are running check-in every 15 minutes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 59 • If applying Notifications templates, the Append pop-up is displayed, as shown below.

• Append adds settings not already specified (good for modifying notifications settings). • Replace overwrites all settings with exactly what was chosen in the template (good for resetting or clearing notifications settings).

5. Optionally, click Append or Replace email addresses.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 60 PART II. STRAY FILES This part includes the following chapters:

• About Stray Files • Adding Stray File Preferences Templates • Editing Stray File Templates • Applying Stray File Templates to an Account • Setting Preferences for Stray Files from Computer Page • Changing a Package Plan for an Account with Stray File Settings • Stray File Scripts

Note: To delete stray files, see Deleting Files and Folders Backup Data.

Chapter 1. About Stray Files Stray files are stored data that have been deleted from the local machine, deleted from the backup set, or excluded from the backup but remain in local and/or cloud storage. Deleting stray files from local and/or cloud storage increases storage space and reduces overall costs. The stray file functionality only affects partners that purchase specific package plans. For specific packages, the stray files default removal is pre- set. For most packages, this default is 60 days with a maximum retention of 60 days. The general package plan uses a 90 – day default setting for stray files. All subsequent subaccounts that are created default to a 90 – day default setting. In addition, if any existing account is assigned to a package pricing plan with stray file settings, all its subaccounts default to a 90 – day default setting. To modify the stray file settings for multiple computers at the same time, you can create a preferences template. See Adding Stray File Preferences Templates.

Stray File Retention The following options are available on the Preferences page:

• Automatically remove stray files after a selected number of days (as determined by the purchased package) • Skip file removal if volume or share is not found.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 61 Figure 18 displays the options available.

Figure 18. Stray File Retention Options.

If the retention settings exceed the limits set for the assigned package plans, the following message is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 62 Chapter 2. Adding Stray File Preferences Templates To add stray file preferences templates, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

The Manage Templates page is displayed.

3. Click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences page is displayed.

4. Click the Add Template tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 63 The System Preferences template is displayed.

5. At the Stray File Retention section, click the check box.

The fields are enabled.

Definition: Stray files are any backed-up files that have been removed from the local machine, the backup set, or excluded by performing the following step.

6. Optionally select the following check boxes:

• Automatically remove stray files after x days. Note: The default is 90 days.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 64 • Skip file removal if volume or share is not found. • Always keep the most recent copy of each file.

Note: The last two options are enabled only when the first item is selected.

7. When you have completed your selections, click the Save button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

8. Click Yes.

The Preferences template is displayed.

You can now apply the template to a single computer or a group of computers. See Templates.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 65

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 66 Chapter 3. Editing Stray File Templates To edit a stray file template, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, select Preferences.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Manage Templates.

The Manage Template page is displayed.

3. Select the Preferences tab.

The Preference templates are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 67 4. Click the edit icon beside the template you want to modify.

The Edit Template page is displayed.

5. At the Stray Files Retention section, make edits, and then click Update.

The Manage Template page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 68 Chapter 4. Applying Stray File Templates to an Account To apply a stray file template to an account, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, select the account to which you wish to apply the template.

The account is highlighted, and the Apply Template tab is displayed at the upper right.

2. Click the Apply Template tab.

The Apply Template pop up is displayed.

3. Select the Preferences drop-down arrow.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 69 The template menu is displayed.

4. Select the template for which you want to apply to all subaccounts.

The template you selected is displayed in the Preferences field.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 70 CAUTION! Applying a template affects all computers under the account. The following message may be displayed that allows you to cancel or apply the application to some of the remaining computers.

If the retention settings exceed the limits set for the assigned package plans, you are notified that the template cannot be applied. 5. Click the Apply button.

The template is applied to all computers under the account.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 71

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 72 Chapter 5. Setting Preferences for Stray Files from Computer Page To set preferences for stray files for each computer from Computer Page, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer Page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the System tab.

The System page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 73 3. Click the Edit button.

The fields are enabled.

Definition: Stray files are any backed-up files that have been removed from the local machine, the backup set, or excluded by performing the following step.

4. At the Stray File Retention section, optionally select the following:

• Automatically remove stray files after x days. Note: The default is 90 days. • Skip file removal if volume or share is not found. • Always keep the most recent copy of each file.

Note: The last two options are enabled only when the first item is selected.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 74 5. When you have completed your selections, click the Save button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Click Yes.

The new settings are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 75

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 76 Chapter 6. Changing a Package Plan for an Account with Stray File Settings

CAUTION! Changing a package plan may update the stray file settings for all computers under the account. If that is the case, a message is displayed that allows you to cancel or apply the application to some of the remaining computers. If the retention settings exceed the limits set for the assigned package plans, you are notified that the template cannot be applied.

To change a package plan for an account with stray file settings, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, select the account you want to which you want to make the change.

The Manage Account page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 77 2. Click the Edit button at the upper right.

The Edit Account page is displayed.

3. Select Backup package down arrow.

The drop-down menu is displayed.

4. Select the new backup package, and then click Save.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 78 The Package Confirmation pop up is displayed.

5. Click Yes.

The package is displayed on the Manage Account page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 79

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 80 Chapter 7. Stray File Scripts This chapter includes the following topics:

• About Administrator Credential • Generating a Stray File List Scripts • Generating a List of the Largest Stray Files to a Specified Path • Remotely Generating a Stray File List • Locally Generating a Stray File List Using .bat File

About Administrator Credentials The following table provides information to help determine which platforms require Administrator credentials.

If running the script using… Then… Windows Server 2012/R2 or .1 The login user must have Administrator credentials. , SBS 2011, or • If UAC is turned off, the login user does not need Windows 7 Administrator credentials. • If UAC is turned on, the login user must have Administrator credentials. Windows 2003 The login user does not need Administrator credentials.

Generating a Stray File List Script To generate a stray file list script, perform the following steps. 1. At the local machine, create an XML file.

Example File Name: C:\StrayFileList.xml

2. Type, or cut and paste, the following script into the newly created file.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 81 3. Open the command window and type the following command.

“c:\Program Files (x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\BackupCLI.exe” /local /in c:\StrayfileList.xml The command is displayed, as shown in Figure 19.

Figure 19. StrayfileList Command.

After the command runs, a CSV file is created that is named: AccountName-Subaccount-mm-dd-yyyy-StrayFileList.csv is generated in C:\Program Files(x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\reports\StrayFileReports\.

Example CSV file: Intronis-0001-03-24-2015-StrayFileList.csv

Note: In the Figure 19 example script, c:\Program Files (x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\BackupCLI.exe is the default, unbranded installation directory for Barracuda. If you rebranded the software, then use the branded installation directory path. The file name, “/in c:\StrayFileList.xml,” is based on of the XML file you created. If you named the XML files something other than c:\StrayFileList.xml, use the new name in the script instead.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 82 4. Open the CSV file to display all stray files, as shown in Figure 20.

Figure 20. CSV Stray File List.

Note: While the above example uses 50 files as the maximum and d:\ as the report save location, you can display any number of files, and save the report to any local storage location.

Generating a List of the Largest Stray Files to a Specified Path To generate a list of the 50 largest stray files to a specified path, perform the following steps. 1. At the local machine, create an XML file.

Example File Name: C:\StrayFileList.xml

2. Type, or cut and paste, the following script into the newly created file.

50 d:\ 3. Open the command window and type the following command.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 83 “c:\Program Files (x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\BackupCLI.exe” /local /in c:\StrayfileList.xml After the command runs, a CSV file that includes the 50 largest stray files is generated in d:\.

Remotely Generating a Stray File List This section provides a scenario and the procedure for remotely generating a stray file list.

Scenario There are two computers with Agents installed. On computer A, the Agent uses an account (example, AccountName | Subaccount | Password: Barracuda | 0001 | P@ssword1). On computer B, the Agent uses another account (example, AccountName | Subaccount | Password: Barracudatest | 0002 | 1234.com).

Procedure To generate a stray file list script remotely, perform the following steps. 1. At the local machine, create an XML file.

Example File Name: C:\StrayFileList.xml

2. Type, or cut and paste, the following script into the newly created file.

3. Open the command window and type the following command.

“c:\Program Files (x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\BackupCLI.exe” /agent “Intronistest:0002” /username Intronistest /password 1234.com /in c:\StrayfileList.xml

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 84 The command is displayed, as shown in Figure 21.

Figure 21. Remote StrayFileList Command.

After the command runs on computer B the stray file list is generated in C:\Program Files(x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\reports\StrayFileReports\.

4. Open the .CSV file to display all stray files, as shown in Figure 20.

Locally Generating a Stray File List Using .bat File To generate a stray file list locally using a .bat file, perform the following steps. 1. At the local machine, at the agent installation path (C:\Program Files(x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\), create a .bat file. 2. Type, or cut and paste, the following script into the newly created file.

" 3. Double-click the .bat file.

After the command window automatically closes, the stray file list is generated in the default path C:\Program Files(x86)\Intronis Technologies\eSureIT\reports\StrayFileReports\.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 85

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 86 PART III. REPORTS This part includes the following chapters:

• Executive Summary Report • User Access Report • Backup Status Report • Miscellaneous Reports • Activity Log

Chapter 1. Executive Summary Report This chapter includes the following topics:

• Executive Summary Report Template • Displaying the Executive Summary Report • Creating Executive Summary Reports • Executive Summary Report Details • Report Details • Account Selection • Report Output

Executive Summary Report Template The Executive Summary Report is a time-saving account summary designed to provide your clients with high-level information about your backups on a regular basis. The report provides information that allows you to demonstrate:

• The value of the backup services that you are providing to your clients. • That your clients’ data is protected and restorable in case of local failure, or a business disaster. • Any problems that may affect your clients’ environment.

The Executive Summary Report features let you create:

• Templates to schedule daily, weekly, and/or monthly reports. See Creating a Template for more information. • A Once/Immediately ad hoc report. See Creating a Once/Immediately Executive Summary Report for more information.

The Report can be sent as an email, a PDF, or a .CSV file.

Displaying the Executive Summary Report To display the Executive Summary Report, perform the following steps. 1. Select View Reports from the ECHOplatform ribbon.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 87 The View Reports menu is displayed.

2. Click Executive Summary Report.

The Executive Summary Report page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 88 Creating Executive Summary Reports This section provides the following topics:

• Creating a Template. • Using an Existing Template. • Creating a Once/Immediately Executive Summary Report

Creating a New Template To create a template, perform the following steps. 1. At the Report Template section, ensure Select an Existing Template or Leave Blank for New Configuration is displayed.

2. In the Report Name section, type the new template report name, as shown in the example below.

Note: The Report Name is required and can use up to 25 characters and spaces.

3. Select the check boxes of the data you want displayed in the report. 4. In the Report Frequency section, select the how often you want the report issued.

Tip! Use the following suggestions in the table below to create new templates based on frequency. Suggested Template Name Frequency Daily Template Reports are emailed at approximately 10 AM (EST) each day. Weekly Template Select the day(s) for weekly reports. Monthly Template Select the day of each month, or the specific weekday of each month. 5. In the Account Section, select the account check boxes to which you want the template to apply, or select the Select All Accounts check box.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 89 The selected accounts are displayed in the Account Selection Summary section. Clicking the remove icon removes the account selection.

6. In the Account Selection Summary section, click an account to display the Report Preview. 7. If you are creating a new template, click the Save Template button beside the report.

The Save Template pop-up is displayed.

8. In the field, type the new template name.

Note: The template name can use up to 16 characters and spaces.

9. When complete, click OK.

Using an Existing Template To use an existing template, perform the following steps. 1. At the Report Template section, click the Select an Existing Template or Leave Blank for New Configuration down arrow.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 90 The available templates you have created are displayed. If you need to create a new template, see Creating a New Template.

2. Select the desired template. 3. In the Account Selection section, select the account check boxes to which you want to apply the template, or select the Select All Accounts check box. 4. In the Account Selection Summary section, click an account to display the Report Preview. 5. Click one of the following buttons:

• Generate PDF of the current report preview. • Generate CSV of the current report preview.

Editing a Template To edit a template, perform the following steps. 1. At the Report Template section, click the Select an Existing Template or Leave Blank for New Configuration down arrow.

The available templates you have created are displayed.

2. Select the template you want to edit.

The template fields are displayed.

3. Make changes to the selections in the Report Data to Display or Report Frequency sections. 4. In the Account Selection section, select the account check boxes to which you want to apply the edited template, or select the Select All Accounts check box. 5. In the Account Selection Summary section, click an account to display the Report Preview. 6. Click the Save Template button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 91 The Save Template pop-up is displayed.

7. Click Save.

Deleting a Template To delete a template, perform the following steps. 1. At the Report Template section, click the Select an Existing Template or Leave Blank for New Configuration down arrow.

The available templates you have created are displayed.

2. Select the template you want to delete, and then click the delete button .

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 92 The delete confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

Creating a Once/Immediately Executive Summary Report To create the Once/Immediately Executive Summary Report, perform the following steps. 1. At the Report Name field, type the name of the report. 2. At the Select Data to Display section, clear the check boxes of the data you do not wish to display. 3. At the Report Frequency section, select Once/Immediately radio button.

The Reporting Frequency fields are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 93 4. Select the start and end date down arrows to display the reporting period calendars.

5. At the Account Selection section, select the account check boxes you want included in the report, or select the Select All Accounts check box.

The selected accounts are displayed in the Account Selection Summary pane.

6. After making your selections, click any account in the Account Selection Summary page to preview the report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 94 The Report Preview is displayed.

7. Click one the following buttons.

• Email Report • Generate PDF • Generate CSV

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 95 Executive Summary Report Details This section provides the following topics:

• Latest Status of Account Activity • Left Side of Report • Right Side of Report

Latest Status of Account Activity The Executive Summary Report displays the latest status of account activity, as shown in Figure 22.

Figure 22. Executive Summary Report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 96 Left Side of Report The left side of the report, as shown in Figure 23, provides the following status:

• Backup agents deployed. • The number of backups run during the period. • The number of restores run during the period. • Amount of data saved by backups. • The number of items saved by having backups in place. • Online storage usage against your plan.

Figure 23. Left Side of Report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 97 Right Side of Report The right side of the report, as shown in Figure 24, provides the following status:

• Backup status for this period • Backup sets to focus on next period • Online usage over time

Figure 24. Right Side of Report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 98 Report Details The Report Details provides information about the following:

• Report Content • Report Frequency • Account Selection • Report Output

Report Content The Report Content pane, shown in Figure 25, lets you do the following:

• Assign a unique report name. • Select the data to be displayed based on your customers’ needs.

Figure 25. Report Content Section.

Unique Report Name The report name is a mandatory field and limited to 25 characters and spaces.

Data Selection The Select Data to Display check boxes lets you select the following information to be included in the report:

• Backup agents • Backups • Restores • Restore data • Restored items • Online storage in use • Backup status graph • Backup Sets to focus on next period • Online usage over time graph

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 99 About the Length of Time between Successful Backups Calculation This section describes how the Length of Time between Successful Backups is calculated. The Length of Time between Successful Backups calculation is the longest gap between two successful backups. The most recent successful backup needs to be in the selected reporting period, but the older success does not. For example, if the reporting period is the entire month of May, and the backup set a completed successfully on May 10th, the software would determine when the last successful backup of backup set ran. The check would not stop at May 1st. If the last successful backup were April 25th, then the length of time would be between May 10th and April 25th, even though the reporting period is May 1st through May 31st.

Report Frequency The Report Frequency pane lets you determine the reporting period and choose when to send a report. You have the following options:

• Once/Immediately • Daily • Weekly • Monthly

Once/Immediately Report The Once/Immediately option allows you to customize a unique, one-off report or make use of an existing template as well as email the report immediately. Figure 26 shows the selected option.

Figure 26. Once/Immediately Report Schedule.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 100 Daily Report Template The Daily Report Template allows you to schedule a report to be emailed at approximately 10 a.m. (EST) every day. Figure 27 shows the selected option.

Figure 27. Daily Report Template.

Weekly Report Template The Weekly Report Template allows you to schedule a report to be emailed at approximately 10 a.m. (EST) on the day you selected. Figure 28 shows the selected option. You can select multiple days.

Figure 28. Weekly Report Template.

Monthly Report Template The Monthly Report Template allows you to schedule a report to be emailed at approximately 10 a.m. (EST) on the day of the month you selected. Figure 29 shows the selected option.

Figure 29. Monthly Report Template.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 101 Account Selection The Account Selection pane lets you choose any or all accounts to which to send the report. Once selected, the accounts are displayed in the right pane as shown in Figure 30.

Clicking the remove icon cancels the account selection.

Figure 30. Accounts Selection. Report Output The report output options, as shown in Figure 31, are the following:

• Update Template • Save Template As • Email Report (not shown). This option is available only for Once/Immediately. • Generate PDF • Generate CSV

The E-Mail template can be formatted in HTML or Text Only.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 102 The emails are account-specific. Each account selected receives an email for a report that includes their data only. A default email message is included in Figure 31.

Figure 31. Report Output.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 103

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 104 Chapter 2. User Access Report This chapter includes the following topics:

• User Access Report Details • Viewing the User Access Report • Filtering the User Access Report • Exporting the User Access Report

User Access Report Details The User Access Report provides you with information about users that have logged into the ECHOplatform portal. The report provides the following details:

• User Name • User Type • IP Address • Browser • Log-in time (EST) • Log-out time (EST)

Note: Log Out Time is displayed only if the user clicks the Log Out button. Log Out Time is not displayed if the user closes the browser window.

Viewing the User Access Report To view the User Access Report, at the ECHOplatform ribbon click View Reports, and then select User Access Report, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 105 The report is displayed, as shown in Figure 32. Note that the default view includes the last 30 days of activity.

Figure 32. User Access Report. Filtering the User Access Report To filter the User Access Report, click any of the Filter By options, as shown below.

The User Access Report filters allow you to sort the report by the following:

• User Name • User Type • IP Address • Browser • Date

For the Username and IP Address filters, you can display filter types by beginning to type them.

For the User Type, Browser, and Date, you can select from a drop-down display.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 106 Note when the Access Report is filtered by Browser and Date, those selections are displayed above the results. You have the option of closing all filter views, except the date, by clicking the remove icon, as shown below.

Exporting the User Access Report To open or save the User Access Report CSV file that is ready for export, click the Export Report button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 107

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 108 Chapter 3. Backup Status Report This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Accessing the Backup Status Report • Filtering Backup Status Report Results • Backup Status Report Logs • Configuring the Backup Status Report • Editing Backup Status E-mail Notifications for Each Computer

Overview The Backup Status Report (BSR) is an all-in-one daily report that allows partners to manage their customers' backups. The BSR also allows partners to filter out backups, restores, and deletes that are working properly so that only the ones that are experiencing issues are displayed.

Accessing the Backup Status Report To access the Backup Status Report, at the ECHOplatform ribbon, click View Reports, Backup Status Reports, as shown below.

Filtering Backup Status Report Results To use Backup Status Report filters, click the Filter Results button, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 109 Select any the following check boxes you want to filter:

• Backup Successfully Completed • Currently Running • Backup Warning • Backup Failed

Backup Status Report Logs The logs include the following status information:

• Backup • Local Start Time • Runtime • Reason

Clicking the links in the Backup column allows you to navigate to the account or the computer with the backup. See Activity Logs for more information.

Configuring the Backup Status Report To configure the Backup Status Report, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Configure Reporting.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 110 The Reporting Conditions page is displayed.

3. In the Reporting Conditions section, configure the information that you want displayed on the Backup Status Report by selecting the appropriate radio buttons.

The following table provides a description of each condition and a recommendation. Condition Description/Example Recommended Indicator Recommendation Status Backup Backup job was Warning Yellow You should be the only one Canceled manually cancelled canceling jobs. You want to be notified of any cancelations just in case. Backup Backup job started Failed Red Indicates the backup job did Exception but could not not complete successfully. communicate results Check logs for information with server; agent on what failed. Check the crashed, connection computer connection to the was lost, computer portal. was shut off. Backup Backup did not run at Failed Red The software maintains the Missed its scheduled time. backup schedule, so it is

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 111 Condition Description/Example Recommended Indicator Recommendation Status known when backups do not run on time. If you uninstall the agent, but do not cancel the backup set, it keeps repeating this condition. Warnings Backup job Completed Black Warnings present in the logs Present completed, but are typically informational. something All files have uploaded unplanned happened successfully. Skipping during the backup Intelliblox and reverting to a that did not prevent full backup is a common files from being warning and happens when a backed up. file or database changes more that 50%. Errors Backup job Warning Yellow While errors are usually not Present completed, but some critical, it is recommended files failed to backup. setting them to warning because some of the files were not backed up. Check the logs for files not backed up, and then repeat the backup job to retrieve files on the second backup. No New File Backup job Completed Black No files changed since the Data completed, but no last backup Backed Up files were backed up; no files changed since the last backup No New Backup job Failed Red For live databases like MS Exchange, completed, but no Exchange and SQL there SQL, VM or Exchange or SQL data should be changes. Indicates Image Data was backed up. a problem with the backup Backed up configuration, or the catalog file. Call technical support. No Data A restore was Failed Red Only happens if you run a Restored initiated, but no data restore manually. You should was restored. have this flagged as read in the logs if no data is restored. No Data A delete was Failed Red Deletes can happen manually Deleted initiated, but no data or automatically with was deleted. retention and revision rules. If a delete fails, call technical support.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 112 Editing Backup Status E-mail Notifications for Each Computer Partners can set individual notifications for each client’s computer for a more specific reporting scheme. This customization is useful for:

• Clients who want to receive notifications themselves • Accounts flagged as having issues at any time • Partners who prefer to receive notifications for individual clients

To set up the Backup Status Report and email notification, see the ECHOplatform Quick Start Partner Guide.

Adding New Email for the Backup Status Report To add a new email, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click the Preferences tab.

The Preferences drop-down menu is displayed.

2. Select Configure Reporting.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 113 The Reporting page is displayed.

3. Click Add New Email to add new email addresses.

The Add New Email pop-up is displayed.

4. Type the address, and then click Submit.

The email address is displayed in the Email Address listing.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 114 Chapter 4. Miscellaneous Reports This part includes the following chapters:

• Plan Percentage Report • Accounts History Report • Account Snapshot Report • No Recent Backup Report • Storage Usage Over Time Report

Plan Percentage Report The Plan Percentage Report provides details on how much of your total reseller data block each client is using. Use this report with the Backup Status Report to understand trends in usage and to identify which clients need to upgrade their plans or determine ways of decreasing their data volume.

Accessing the Plan Percentage Report To view the Plan Percentage report, at the ECHOplatform ribbon, click View Reports, and then select Plan Percentage, as shown below.

Figure 33 provides an example of a Plan Percentage Report.

Figure 33. Plan Percentage Report.

The report provides the following details:

• Account • Name • The user plan • Storage usage

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 115 • How much additional storage is being used • The percent of your Partner plan each user is using

Accounts History Report The Accounts History Report provides a graphic of the number of active accounts.

Accessing the Accounts History Report To access the Accounts History Report, at the ECHOplatform ribbon, click the View Reports tab, and then select Accounts History, as shown below.

Figure 34 provides an example of an Accounts History Report.

Figure 34. Accounts History Report.

Use the date drop-down menu to select the date range you want displayed, and then click the Apply button.

Account Snapshot Report To obtain usage and billing data, you can use the Account Snapshot Report, which can be exported to a .csv file and imported into many accounting applications.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 116 Accessing the Account Snapshot Report To access the Account Snapshot Report, click the View Reports tab, and then select Account Snapshot, as shown below.

Figure 35 provides an example of an Account Snapshot Report.

Figure 35. Account Snapshot Report. No Recent Backup Report The No Recent Backup Report lists computers that have not backed up in the last 3 days.

Accessing the No Recent Backup Report To access the No Recent Backup Report, click the View Reports tab, and then select No Recent Backups, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 117 Figure 36 provides an example of a No Recent Backup Report.

Figure 36. No Recent Backup Report. Storage Usage Over Time Report The Storage Usage Over Time Report provides a graphic of storage usage over time. This report is available only to partners on the volume-pricing plan.

Accessing the Storage Usage Over Time Report To access the Storage Usage Over Time Report, click the View Reports tab, and then select Storage Usage Over Time. To choose time period, click the date arrows to select from calendars, then click the Apply button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 118 Figure 37 provides an example of a Storage Usage Over Time Report.

Figure 37. Storage Usage Over Time Report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 119

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 120 Chapter 5. Activity Log This part includes the following chapters:

• About Viewing Activity Logs • Viewing Activity Logs at the Home Dashboard • Viewing Activity Logs at the Account Page • Viewing Activity Logs at the Computer Page • Viewing Activity Logs through the Backup Status Report

About Viewing Activity Logs The Activity log allows you to

• View a summary of previous backups. • Export a CSV file of the log by clicking the Export to CSV button.

• Edit the backup set name by clicking the edit icon.

Figure 38 provides a display of the Activity Log.

Figure 38. Activity Log.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 121 Activity logs can be viewed from the Management Portal in the following places.

• At the Home Dashboard • At the Account page • At the Computer page • Through the Backup Status Report • Any location in the portal that shows backup, delete, and restore jobs allow the job to be clicked to populate a dialog box for viewing logs.

Note: The client computer must have .NET framework 4.5.2, or higher installed for the backup agent to communicate with the management portal. Activity Logs can be exported in a .CSV format for viewing in Microsoft Excel and similar software.

Viewing Activity Logs at the Home Dashboard To view logs at the Home Dashboard, perform the following steps.

1. At the Home Dashboard, click the arrow by the account or selecting the Expand All check box, as highlighted below.

The detailed list for each account with links to status logs and associated computers is displayed.

2. Click the link in the Reason column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 122 The Activity Log page is displayed.

Viewing Activity Logs at the Account Page To view Activity Logs at the account page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the desired account name.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 123 The Manage Account page is displayed.

2. Click the Activity tab.

The Activity results are displayed.

3. Click the desired computer link.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 124 The Computer’s activity results are displayed.

4. See Viewing Activity Logs at the Computer Page in the next section.

Viewing Activity Logs at the Computer Page To view Activity Logs at the Computer page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Activity tab.

The Computer page is displayed with the Activity results.

2. At the Backup Set/Action column, click the desired link.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 125 The Activity Log is displayed.

At the Activity Log, you can perform the following actions:

• Click Export to .CSV button at top-right to export the log in a .CSV format for viewing in Microsoft Excel and similar software.

• Click the edit icon to open the backup set. • Click the down arrow beside the Type column to display the complete description of the result.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 126 Viewing Activity Logs through the Backup Status Report To view Activity Logs through the Backup Status Report, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click View Reports, Backup Status Report, as shown below.

The Backup Status Report is displayed.

2. Click the name link of the desired backup set.

For example, Files and Folder 1.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 127 The Activity Log is displayed.

See Viewing Activity Logs at the Computer Page for more information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 128 PART IV. FILES AND FOLDERS BACKUP AND RESTORE This part includes the following chapters:

• Files and Folders Backup • Files and Folders Restore

Chapter 1. Files and Folders Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up • Backing Up Files and Folders • Editing Files and Folders Backup Sets • Removing Files and Folders Backup Sets • Deleting Files and Folders

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up On the Backup Select page, you can view your selections with the All Selected Item pop-up. This feature allows you to navigate to your backup selections with a display that mimics the Windows interface.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 129 Figure 39 provides an example of the All Selected Items pop-up window.

Figure 39. View All Selected Items Pop-up.

The display includes the following features:

• Green text indicates that new items added to the folders are automatically backed up. • Black text indicates file items that are automatically backed up. • Red text indicates items that are excluded from the backup. • A count of the selected items appears at the upper right of the list and decrements in real-time to match the quantity of selected items.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 130 Viewing All Selected Items To view all selected items, perform the following steps. 1. At the Files and Folders Selection page, click the View All Selected Items button located above the upper-right section of the selection panel, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 131 The pop-up displays all items you selected, as shown in the following example.

2. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selections.

Note: You may only remove items from the list.

3. Click the Save button to apply changes made in the pop-up.

Note: Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 132 Backing Up Files and Folders To back up Files and Folders, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 133 3. In the Backup Type pane, click Files and Folders.

The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following options:

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 134 The selection is highlighted, and the file and folders are displayed.

6. Select the row of the files and folders you would like to back up, as shown below.

The computer where the agent is installed, and the available files and folders for backup are displayed.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

7. To back up files and folders on another network location that is not listed, see Adding a Network Location. 8. Click the View All Selected Items button, to display and remove any selections.

The All Selected Files and Folders Items pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 135 Note: Green text indicates that new items are automatically backed up. By default, selecting a folder displays green text. Red text indicates items that are excluded from the back up.

9. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selection.

Note: You may only remove items from the list.

10. To apply changes made in the pop-up, click the Save button.

Note: Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

11. After making your selections, click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

12. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Schedule Page Interval Start and End Time Options for more information.

Notes:

• Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • Minutely and hourly recurrences cannot be mixed with daily/weekly recurrences. • Only one minutely or hourly schedule can be configured. • The default schedule is daily every weekday starting at 11 p.m. and the Allow to Finish check box is enabled.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 136 13. Clearing the Allow To Finish check box allows you to assign an End time to cancel a running backup the following day. You must select a time before the next scheduled Start time.

The schedule is displayed in the Schedule column.

14. After setting the schedule, click Next.

The Retention page is displayed.

15. Optionally, select the number of days and versions you wish to archive.

Note: The default is 30 retained versions and no fewer than 10 versions.

16. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 137 Example: The setting of a daily backup kept for 30 days and no fewer than 10 versions mean that 30 versions are kept. However, a setting of once a week means that after 10 weeks, 10 versions are kept.

17. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

18. Use the following table to help make optional selections.

Temporary Folder Optionally, specify where the temporary folder that is used in backing up files and folders resides. Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space. Snapshot Mode Snapshot mode ensures all files are backed up from the same volume snapshot (recommended). Failed File Behavior Specify how you want backups to handle failed files by retrying failed files and/or retrying locked files. Wildcard Inclusions Set wildcard inclusions to back up only certain file types.

Separate each phrase with commas. Commit each phrase by pressing Enter. Example: To include files that have the .jpg extension or have file names that end with 2016, enter the following filter: *.jpg, *2016. Archive Bit When disabled, the agent skips files with an unset archive bit. Select the Enable Archive Bit check box to enable archive bit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 138 19. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 20. After making your selections, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

21. Verify your selections, and then click Create Backup Set.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the latest backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 139 Editing Files and Folders Backup Sets To edit a Files and Folders backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing Up Files and Folders for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 140 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

3. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Backing Up Files and Folders for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Schedule Page Interval Start and End Time Options.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 141 If you have removed some selections from the backup set, the following message is displayed on the Advanced page (shown below):

4. To delete stray files from online servers, select the Delete stray files from online servers check box, as shown below.

All versions of those files are set for removal during the next backup from the Cloud and/or local vault.

5. After making all your edits, click the Update Backup button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Your Backup Sets page is displayed with the updated backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 142 A File or Folder Selected for Backup Is No Longer Found

When editing a File and Folder backup, if a file or folder selected for backup is not found, the prompt below is displayed asking if you would like to remove that file or folder from the backup set. The backup set cannot be saved without removing those files or folders.

Clicking OK removes the listed items from the backup set after the backup set is updated and saved. Failure to save this backup set and remove the listed items causes errors in the logs.

Removing Files and Folders Backup Sets To remove a Files and Folders backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing Up Files and Folders for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 143 2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting Files and Folders This chapter includes the following topics:

• Deleting by Folder Hierarchy • Deleting by Daily Snapshots • Deleting by Backup Sets • Deleting Stray Files • Deleting Files and Folders Backups

Deleting by Folder Hierarchy You can delete files and folders from the hierarchy that you originally backed up. You can delete multiple revisions.

Deleting by Daily Snapshots You can only delete from a single snapshot and device/share at a time.

Deleting by Backup Sets You can only delete from a single backup set at a time.

Deleting Stray Files You can delete files no longer being backed up.

Deleting Files and Folders Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and cannot be accessed or restored. To delete a Files and Folders backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 144 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select Files and Folders.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 145 The Delete page is displayed.

4. Select the backup type you want to browse by clicking the relevant radio button as described in the following table.

By Folder Hierarchy Browse the hierarchy of the files and folders you originally backed up to select the data you want to delete. By Daily Snapshots View data by dates and delete specific instances. By Backup Sets Browse the files and folders you want to delete by viewing them organized by the backup sets you created. Stray Files Delete files no longer being backed up.

5. For example, select the Daily Snapshots banner.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 146 The Snapshots from the last 7 days are displayed.

6. Select the Snapshot radio button of the file you want to delete.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders. Note: You can only delete from one daily snapshot and device/share at a time. Selecting a different snapshot clears the current selection.

7. Click the View All Selected Items button to display and remove any selections.

The All Selected Items pop-up is displayed.

8. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selections.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 147 Note: You may only remove items from the list.

9. To apply changes made in the pop-up, click the Save button.

Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

10. When satisfied with your selections, click the Delete button.

The Delete confirmation pop-up is displayed.

11. Click the Yes button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest deletion.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 148 Chapter 2. Files and Folders Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring Files and Folders by Folder Hierarchy • Restoring Files and Folders by Daily Snapshots • Restoring Files and Folders by Backup Sets

Overview You can restore Files and Folders by:

• Folder Hierarchy • Daily Snapshots • Backup Sets

Folder Hierarchy Restoring by Folder Hierarchy lets you restore files and folders from the hierarchy that you originally backed up. Each file may have been backed up multiple times and therefore have multiple revisions. By default, the most recent revision is selected, but you can choose any revision that is displayed.

Daily Snapshots Restoring by Daily Snapshots lets you restore a version of files and folders from a specific date. Seven of the most recent daily snapshots are available for restore. You can only restore from one daily snapshot at a time.

Backup Sets Restoring by Backup Sets lets you restore files and folders organized by the backup sets you have created.

Restoring Files and Folders by Folder Hierarchy To restore Files and Folders by Folder Hierarchy, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 149 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Files and Folders.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 150 The Select page is displayed with Folder Hierarchy selected as the default.

4. In the Select Your Files and/or Folders pane, select the row of the files and folders you would like to restore, as shown below.

The folders available for restore are displayed.

5. Click the check box of the folder you would like to restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 151 Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

6. To review and edit your selections, click the View All Selected Items button. See Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up.

The All Selected Items pop-up is displayed.

7. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selections.

• You may only remove items from the list. • Exclusions are marked in red.

8. To apply changes made in the pop-up, click the Save button.

Note: Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 152 9. After making your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

10. At the Destination section, to select the original destination path, click the Original Path radio button. 11. To select an alternate path, click the Alternate Path radio button, and then browse to the destination. See Browsing to a Folder. 12. At the Existing Files section, select one of the following radio buttons regarding the restoration of existing files:

• Do not overwrite any existing files with restored files • Overwrite existing files with restored files • If a file already exists, rename the restored file

13. After making your selection, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 153 The Advanced page is displayed.

14. Optionally, select from the following options to specify the advanced features of the restore:

• Restore NTFS File Permissions • Restore File Attributes • Restore Last Modified Date

15. Click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

16. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 154 The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

17. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

Restoring Files and Folders by Daily Snapshots To restore Files and Folders by Daily Snapshots, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 155 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Files and Folders.

The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Daily Snapshots radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 156 The available snapshots are displayed in the Select pane.

Note: Seven of the most recent daily snapshots are available for restore. You can only restore from one daily snapshot at a time. Selecting a different snapshot clears your current selection.

5. To display more snapshots, select the row of the files and folders you would like to restore, as shown below.

The folders available for restore are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 157 6. Click the check box of the folder in which the snapshot resides that you would like to restore.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

7. Click the radio button of the snapshot you would like to restore. 8. To review and edit your selections, click the View All Selected Items button. See Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up.

The All Selected Items pop-up is displayed.

9. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selections.

Note: You may only remove items from the list.

10. To apply changes made in the pop-up, click the Save button.

Note: Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

11. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 158 The Destination page is displayed.

12. At the Destination section, to select the original destination path, click the Original Path radio button. 13. To select an alternate path, click the Alternate Path radio button, and then browse to the destination. See Browsing to a Folder. 14. At the Existing Files section, select one of the following radio buttons regarding the restoration of existing files:

• Do not overwrite any existing files with restored files • Overwrite existing files with restored files • If a file already exists, rename the restored file

15. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 159 The Advanced page is displayed.

16. Optionally, select from the following options to specify the advanced features of the restore:

• Restore NTFS File Permissions • Restore File Attributes • Restore Last

17. Click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 160 18. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

19. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the latest restore.

Restoring Files and Folders by Backup Sets To restore Files and Folders by Backup Sets, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 161 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Files and Folders.

The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Sets radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 162 The available Backup Sets are displayed.

5. To display more backup sets, select the row of the files and folders you would like to restore, as shown below.

The folders available for restore are displayed.

6. Click the check box of the folder in which the files reside that you would like to restore.

Note: You can only restore from one backup set at a time.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 163 Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

7. To review and edit your selections, click the View All Selected Items button. See Description of the View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up.

The All Selected Items pop-up is displayed.

8. Click the remove icon to remove items from your selections.

Note: You may only remove items from the list.

9. To apply changes made in the pop-up, click the Save button.

Note: Clicking Save commits the changes, closes the pop-up, and returns you to the Selection page. Clicking the Cancel button ignores changes made in the pop-up list and returns you to the Selection page.

10. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 164 The Destination page is displayed.

11. At the Destination section, to select the original destination path, click the Original Path radio button. 12. To select an alternate path, click the Alternate Path radio button, and then browse to the destination. See Browsing to a Folder. 13. At the Existing Files section, select one of the following radio buttons regarding the restoration of existing files:

• Do not overwrite any existing files with restored files • Overwrite existing files with restored files • If a file already exists, rename the restored file

14. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 165 The Advanced page is displayed.

15. Optionally, select from the following options to specify the advanced features of the restore:

• Restore NTFS File Permissions • Restore File Attributes • Restore Last

16. Click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

17. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 166 The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

18. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the latest restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 167

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 168 PART V. VMWARE STANDARD BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• VMware Standard Backup • VMware Standard Restore

Chapter 1. VMware Standard Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• VMware Standard Backup Overview • Backing up VMware Standard • Editing VMware Standard Backup Sets • Removing VMware Standard Backup Sets • Deleting VMware Standard Backup Data

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

VMware Standard Backup Overview VMware Standard allows you to select VMs running on supported managed and unmanaged ESXi hosts to back up to the customer’s local vault, to the cloud, or both. A VM cannot be part of more than one VMware Standard backup set or more than one QuickSpin backup at a time. However, a VM can be part of a VMware Standard and a VMware QuickSpin backup set simultaneously. vSphere API Configuration This section provides a description of how to configure a VMware 6.5 host to allow the backup agent to back up and restore data to and from the host. By default, VMware ESXi 6.5 does not support TLS 1.0. TLS 1.0 is the version of the TLS/SSL protocol that the agent uses to connect to an ESXi host. TLS 1.0 must be enabled on all the hosts managed by the vCenter Server. This requirement is necessary because the host that is responsible for transferring data from the disk may not be the host on which the VM resides (or the one to which a VM is being restored).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 169 Enabling TLS 1.0 on an ESXi 6.5 Host To enable TLS 1.0 on an ESXi 6.5 Host, perform the following steps. 1. Connect to the ESXi host via ssh. 2. Add the following line to /etc/vmware/config: tls.protocols=tls1.0,tls1.1,tls1.2 3. Restart the rhttpproxy service by running the following command: /etc/init.d/rhttpproxy restart

Backing up VMware Standard To back up VMware Standard, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 170 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click VMware Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 171 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following radio button options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 172 6. To add a new unmanaged ESXi host or vCenter, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step.

Add New Server

a. At the Path field, type the IP address of the ESXi or vCenter server you want to add.

Note: If the host is managed by vCenter, type the vCenter's IP address. You can then navigate to the host you want.

After entering the IP address, you are prompted for authenticating with the ESXi or vCenter server. You need to provide administrator level permissions to the ESXi or vCenter server. It is important that the account credentials not expire frequently or else the backup fails.

The add button is activated.

b. Click the add button.

The new server address is displayed.

• To change server credentials, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step. Note: Changing server credentials is primarily used if admin credentials on the host or vCenter have changed since the last backup set was created.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 173 Change Server Credentials

To change Server Credentials, perform the following steps.

a. At the Confirm selection pane, select a virtual machine.

The Change Server Credentials button is enabled.

b. Click the Change Server Credentials button.

The credentials pop-up is displayed.

c. Make your changes.

Note 1: The backup set relies on these credentials to perform the backup. Use credentials that do not change often, else the backup fails.

Note 2: You can authenticate to the following:

• Unmanaged ESXi host

• vCenter that manages one or more ESXi hosts

d. Click OK.

The new server address is displayed.

7. At the Current selection pane, select the VMs to be backed up.

Note: You are required to select at least one VM. Any VMs that are included in other backup sets are grayed out.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions of the VM.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 174 Your selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box. Note: vApps are currently not supported for backup.

8. Click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 175 9. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out.

10. After setting the schedule, click Next.

The Retention page is displayed.

11. Select the number of versions you wish to archive.

Note: The default is no fewer than 4 recoverable versions of backups at the destination for 28 days. The backup set preserves the current state of the virtual machines only. User-generated snapshots are not saved.

12. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 176 The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

13. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

14. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 15. At the Force Full Backups section, use the arrows to specify how often full backups are performed after incremental backups.

Note: The default setting is a full backup is forced every 21 incremental backups.

TIP: Taking a full backup periodically ensures the stability of the backup chain. Full backups take longer to run but result in shorter incremental chains and potentially shorter recovery times.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 177 The Summary page is displayed.

16. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The scheduled backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 178 Editing VMware Standard Backup Sets To edit a VMware Standard backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 179 3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

Note: Changed locations of the destination hosts of the recovery VMs, are not changed until the next backup set is run.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit your current settings. See Backing up VMware Standard for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules.

5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the current backup status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 180 Removing VMware Standard Backup Sets To remove a VMware Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing up VMware Standard for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 181 Note: By default, deleting the backup set does not delete the VMs from the cloud or local vault. Deleting the backup set only stops backing up the VMs contained in this backup set.

3. Optionally select the Delete the VM(s) from the cloud and local vault check box, and then click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting VMware Standard Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete a VMware Standard backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 182 The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select VMware Standard.

The Delete page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 183 4. Select the VM for which you want to delete revisions.

The selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

Note: If you click the arrow button next to the VM, a list of revisions is displayed. You can choose to delete specific revisions instead of the entire VM.

If you select certain revisions to delete that other revisions (not currently selected for deletion) are dependent on, the following message is displayed.

If you select Yes, the dependent backups are also selected for deletion. If you select No, nothing is changed. The message is displayed until selections are made that have no dependent revisions.

5. When satisfied with your selections, click the Delete button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 184 The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Select the check box of one of the options. See VMware Standard Delete Options for more information. 7. Click the Delete button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

VMware Standard Delete Options VMware Standard backup sets use deduplication and block-level processing. For these backup sets, the following options are available on the Delete Selection screen:

• Retain backup data for 7 days • Delete all deduplication data

Retain Backup Data for 7 Days By selecting the Retain backup data for 7 days check box, you can retain deleted data in your Local Vault for deduplication purposes for seven days. At the end of seven days, this data is deleted from your Local Vault.

This option is useful if you are backing up VMs on this machine and would like to use the existing blocks for de-duplication purposes. At the end of 7 days, this data is deleted.

If you choose not to select this option, the data that you have selected is deleted from the Local Vault immediately.

Delete All Deduplication Data By selecting the Delete all deduplication data check box, you can immediately delete any deduplication data not being used. This option forces a block-level cleanup when the delete finishes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 185 This option is useful if you do not want to use existing blocks for de-duplication purposes anymore and you want to delete them immediately. Note: You cannot select both check boxes at the same time; selecting one disables the other.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 186 Chapter 2. VMware Standard Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring VMware Standard Backups

Overview With VMware Standard restores, you can perform the following actions:

• Restore VMs locally or from the cloud • Restore VMs in a sandboxed test mode or production mode • Choose to start the VMs automatically upon restore or not

VMware Standard Recovery Types While performing the restore procedure, you are prompted to select how to verify and recover your data to the restore destination. The following options are provided:

• Sandboxed Test Recovery • Production Recovery

Sandboxed Test Recovery is a non-destructive means for you to verify the integrity of your backed-up VMs without affecting normal business operation. Your production VMs remain powered on and operational. The selected recovery VMs are powered on within an isolated VLAN. Production Recovery performs an instant recovery of your production VMs with selected recovery VMs. If the production VM is still running, it is shut down before powering up the recovery VMs.

Restoring VMware Standard Backup Sets To restore a VMware Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 187 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click VMware Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 188 The Select page is displayed.

4. In the Current Selection pane, select the VMs and revisions to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the VM displays more revisions of the VM.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 189 Your selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

5. After making your selections, click Next.

The Recovery Type page is displayed.

6. Select how to verify and recover your data to the restore destination.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 190 If you select Sandboxed Test Recovery (default option):

• The source/production VMs are not shut down. • The recovery VMs selected are started on their own separate VLAN to avoid Network IP conflicts with the production VMs.

If you select Production Recovery:

• The source/production VMs are shut down (if available and if possible). • The recovery VMs. once restored, are started on the production network. They assume the role of the original production VMs.

See VMware Standard Recovery Types for more information.

7. Optionally, select the After the VM(s) is restored, automatically start it check box

Note: When enabled, Auto Start starts the VMs automatically upon restore.

8. Click Next.

The Recovery VM Destination page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 191 Requirements: You must select the Destination Host and the Datastore where you want to restore the recovery VMs. The Resource Pool and VM Folder are optional; however, you must select None on the Destination page if you do not want these options.

9. To add a new destination ESXi or vCenter server, perform the following Add New Server steps; else proceed to next step.

Add New ESXi or vCenter Server

a. To add a new ESXi or vCenter server, click the Add New Server button.

The address field is displayed.

b. Type the IP address of the server you want to add.

Note: If the host is managed by vCenter, type the vCenter's IP address, and then navigate to the host you want.

The Add button is activated.

c. Click the Add button.

The new server address is displayed.

10. Select the ellipsis in the Destination Host column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 192 The Destination Host pop up is displayed.

CAUTION! As a best practice, select a host for the restore destination that does not already contain the protected VM. If the same host is selected and fails, both the protected VM and the recovery VM are lost.

11. Select the Destination Host.

The Change Server Credentials option is activated.

12. To change server credentials, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 193 Change Server Credentials

To change Server Credentials, perform the following steps.

a. At the Confirm selection pane, select a host.

The Change Server Credentials button is enabled.

b. Click the Change Server Credentials button.

The credentials pop-up is displayed.

c. Make your changes.

Note 1: The backup set relies on these credentials to perform the backup. Use credentials that do not change often, else the backup fails.

Note 2: You can authenticate to the following:

• Unmanaged ESXi host

• vCenter that manages one or more ESXi hosts

d. Click OK.

The new server address is displayed.

13. Select the Destination Host.

The ellipses are displayed for the other options.

14. Select the ellipsis in the Resource Pool column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 194 The Resource Pool pop up is displayed.

15. Select the Resource Pool radio button or the None radio button, if you do not want a Resource Pool, and then click OK.

16. Select the ellipsis in the VM Folder column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 195 The VM Folder pop up is displayed.

17. Select the VM Folder radio button or the None radio button, if you do not want a VM Folder, and then click OK.

18. Select the ellipsis in the Datastore column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 196 The Datastore pop up is displayed.

19. Select a Datastore radio button, and then click OK.

Recommendation: As a best practice, do not choose the same Datastore as the one where the source VM resides.

If the recovery VM is placed on the same Datastore as the source VM and that Datastore fails, both VMs are lost.

After making your selections, the completed configuration is denoted with a check mark as shown below.

20. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 197 The Summary page is displayed

21. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

If you selected Production Recovery at the Destination page, then the following confirmation pop-up is displayed.

By selecting the checkbox and selecting Yes, the currently running Production VM(s) are shut down and replaced by the VMware Standard VMs you have selected to restore.

22. Click the Yes, restore the selected VM(s) check box, and then click Yes.

If you selected Sandboxed Test Recovery at the Destination page, then the following confirmation pop-up is displayed.

23. Click Yes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 198 The Restore Selections page is displayed showing the status of the restore. Note: If the destination host you restore to has a VM with the same name, the restored VM appends the following extension to the name: _Recovery (or Recovery1 if _Recovery exists).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 199

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 200 PART VI. VMWARE QUICKSPIN BACKUP AND RESTORE This part includes the following chapters:

• VMware QuickSpin Backup • VMware QuickSpin Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. VMware QuickSpin Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• VMware QuickSpin Backup Overview • Backing up VMware QuickSpin • Editing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets • Removing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets • Deleting VMware QuickSpin Backup Data

VMware QuickSpin Backup Overview VMware QuickSpin extends VM backup ability to allow you to spin up a standby virtual machine onsite in a matter of minutes in case of a failure with your primary servers. The VMware QuickSpin backup replicates the source VM data to a standby VM on another host. You must select the Destination Host and the Datastore that will be hosting the recovery VMs. It is optional to designate a resource pool and VM folder; however, you must select None on the Recovery VM Destination page if you do not want these options. When the backup runs, the recovery VM is updated so the backup/standby VM is always up-to-date as of the latest backup. Whatever has changed between the last backup and the current backup is then stored in the local storage that you selected. A VM cannot be part of more than one VMware Standard backup set or more than one QuickSpin backup at a time. However, a VM can be part of a VMware Standard and a VMware QuickSpin backup set simultaneously.

VMware QuickSpin Licensing A monthly license fee is charged on a per ESXi host basis when 1 or more VMs are backed up from that ESXi host. The license fee is the same whether you back up 1 VM or many VMs on that ESXi host. This license fee is incurred for each ESXi host in your inventory that has one or more VMs being backed up.

Backing up VMware QuickSpin To create a VMware QuickSpin backup, perform the following steps. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 201 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 202 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click VMware QuickSpin.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 203 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 204 5. To add a new ESXi or vCenter server, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step.

Add New ESXi or vCenter Server

a. At the Path field, type the IP address of the server you want to add.

Note: If the ESXi host is managed by vCenter, type the vCenter's IP address. You can then navigate to the ESXi host you want.

After entering the IP address, you are prompted for authenticating with the ESXi host or vCenter. You need to provide administrator level permissions to the ESXi host or vCenter. It is important that the account credentials should not expire frequently or else the backup fails.

The add button is activated.

b. Click the add button.

The change server credentials pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 205 6. To change server credentials, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step.

Change Server Credentials

To change Server Credentials, perform the following steps.

a. At the Confirm selection pane, select a virtual machine.

The Change Server Credentials button is enabled.

b. Click the Change Server Credentials button.

The credentials pop-up is displayed.

c. Make your changes.

Note 1: The backup set relies on these credentials to perform the backup. Use credentials that do not change often, else the backup fails.

Note 2: You can authenticate to the following:

• Unmanaged ESXi host

• vCenter that manages one or more ESXi hosts

d. Click OK.

The new server address is displayed.

7. Select the VMs to be backed up.

Note: Any VMs that already are included in other backup sets are grayed out.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the VM displays more revisions of the VM.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 206 Your selections are displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

8. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 207 The Recovery VM Destination page is displayed.

Requirements: You must select the Destination Host and the Datastore that is hosting the recovery VMs. It is optional to designate a resource pool and VM folder; however, you must select None if you do not want these options.

9. To add a new ESXi or vCenter server, perform the following steps; else proceed to next step.

Add New ESXi or vCenter Server

a. At the Path field, type the IP address of the ESXi or vCenter server you want to add.

Note: If the ESXi host is managed by vCenter, type the vCenter's IP address, and then navigate to the ESXi host you want.

After entering the IP address, you are prompted for authenticating with the ESXi host or vCenter. You need to provide administrator level permissions to

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 208 the ESXi host or vCenter. It is important that the account credentials should not expire frequently or else the backup fails.

The add button is activated.

b. Click the add button.

The new server address is displayed.

10. Select the ellipsis in the Destination Host column.

The Destination Host pop up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 209 CAUTIONS!

• As a best practice, select an ESXi host for the restore destination that does not already contain the protected VM. Otherwise, both the protected and recovery VM could be lost. • To increase the recoverability of the VM, protect it by using a VMware Standard backup set in addition to this VMware QuickSpin backup set. This action protects the VMs by storing both a local and cloud backup of your VM.

11. Click the Destination Host.

The Change Server Credentials option is activated.

12. To change server credentials, perform the steps below; else proceed to next step.

Change Server Credentials

To change Server Credentials, perform the following steps.

a. At the Confirm selection pane, select a virtual machine.

The Change Server Credentials button is enabled.

b. Click the Change Server Credentials button.

The credentials pop-up is displayed.

c. Make your changes.

Note 1: The backup set relies on these credentials to perform the backup. Use credentials that do not change often, else the backup fails.

You can authenticate to the following:

• Unmanaged ESXi host

• vCenter that manages one or more ESXi hosts

d. Click OK.

The new server address is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 210 13. Select the Destination Host, and then click OK.

The ellipses are displayed for the other options.

14. Select the ellipsis in the Resource Pool column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 211 The Resource Pool pop up is displayed.

15. Select the Resource Pool radio button or the None radio button, if you do not want a Resource Pool, and then click OK.

16. Select the ellipsis in the VM Folder column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 212 The VM Folder pop up is displayed.

17. Select the VM Folder radio button or the None radio button, if you do not want a VM Folder, and then click OK.

18. Select the ellipsis in the Datastore column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 213 The Datastore pop up is displayed.

19. Select a Datastore radio button, and then click OK.

Recommendation: As a best practice, do not choose the same Datastore as the source VM. Otherwise, both production and recovery VM could both be lost in the event of a Datastore failure.

After making your selections, the completed configuration is denoted with a green check mark as shown below.

20. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 214 The Schedule page is displayed.

21. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• An hourly backup is the default schedule for the backup set. • Multiple weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • Minutely, hourly or daily recurrences cannot be mixed with weekly recurrences. • Only one minutely, hourly or daily schedule can be configured. • The Allow to Finish check box is selected and grayed-out.

22. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 215 The Retention page is displayed.

Notes:

• The backup default schedule is every 1 hour. Keeping 96 versions retains 4 days of recoverable versions at the destination. • The backup set preserves the current state of the virtual machines only. User generated snapshots are not saved.

23. Optionally, select how many versions of each file you would like to keep, and then click Next.

Note: The number of revisions can be set to any number between 1 and 99. The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 216 24. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder.

Requirement: You must specify a location for the local storage of the incremental backups.

25. Type the path or browse to where the incremental versions of your recovery VMs are to be stored, and then click Next. See Browsing to a Folder.

Note: To restore a recovery VM successfully, you need both the recovery VM snapshot information (in vSphere) and the incremental version information stored in this location. This data is used to recover previous versions of VMware QuickSpin recovery VMs.

The Summary page is displayed.

Licensing Note: If you added an unlicensed host and added a VM to back up, the following message is displayed on the Summary page indicating a licensing fee charge. See VMware QuickSpin Licensing for more information.

26. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 217 If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The scheduled backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

Editing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets To edit a VMware QuickSpin backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing up VMware QuickSpin for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 218 2. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

3. Select any of the tabs to display and edit your current settings. See Backing up VMware QuickSpin for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • Any changes to the locations of the destination hosts of the recovery VMs are not effective until the next backup runs. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules.

4. After making your edits, click the Update Backup button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the updated backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 219 Changing a VMware QuickSpin Destination Host To change a VMware QuickSpin Destination Host, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the VMware QuickSpin Recovery VM Destination page. See Editing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets for instructions.

The Recovery VM Destination page is displayed.

2. Select the ellipsis icon in the column of the Destination Host.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 220 The following pop up with your current selection is displayed.

CAUTIONS!

• As a best practice, select an ESXi host for the restore destination that does not already contain the protected VM. Otherwise, both the protected and recovery VM could be lost. • To increase the recoverability of the VM, protect it by using a VMware Standard backup set in addition to this VMware QuickSpin backup set. Doing this protects the VM both locally and offsite in the cloud.

3. Select the new Destination Host.

The following pop-up is displayed.

4. Click Yes.

The other destination options ellipses are displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 221 5. Select your other configuration options. See Backing up VMware QuickSpin for details. 6. When finished with your changes, click Update Backup.

The following pop-up is displayed.

7. Click the Yes check box.

The Yes button is activated.

8. Click the Yes button.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

Changing a VMware QuickSpin Incremental Version Storage Location CAUTION! If you change the incremental version storage location, all revisions become invalidated and the next backup run is a full backup. It is recommended you choose a location on the same drive as your Local Vault, if you have one set up. To change an Incremental Version Storage Location, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the VMware QuickSpin Advanced page. See Editing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets for details.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 222 The Advanced page is displayed.

2. At the Incremental Version Storage Location Path field, type or browse to where the incremental versions of the recovery VMs are to be stored. See Browsing to a Folder. 3. Click Update Backup.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 223 Removing VMware QuickSpin Backup Sets To remove a VMware QuickSpin backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing up VMware QuickSpin for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 224 The following pop-up is displayed.

3. Optionally, click the Delete the VM(s) from the VMware QuickSpin destination check box, and then click Confirm.

The recovery VM, any stored increments, and the backup set is removed.

Deleting VMware QuickSpin Backup Data CAUTION! The Delete function deletes the VMware QuickSpin backup data. Deleted data is completely purged and cannot be accessed or restored. The Delete function removes all historical revisions. You cannot delete specific revisions.

To delete a VMware QuickSpin backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 225 The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Click VMware QuickSpin.

Note: This action deletes the recovery VM and any increments that are stored.

The Delete page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 226 4. Select the check box of the VM you want to delete.

Your selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel. Click the remove icon to remove any selections for deletion or clear the VM check box.

5. When satisfied with your selections, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Click the Yes button.

When the delete is complete, the Deletes Selections page is displayed with the latest deletion.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 227

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 228 Chapter 2. VMware QuickSpin Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring VMware QuickSpin Backups

Overview VMware QuickSpin restores are speedy because the recovery VMs are standing by locally at the customer’s site, ready to be started to replace their disabled production counterparts. VMware QuickSpin creates a recovery VM on a local vCenter/ESXi host. In addition, with VMware QuickSpin, you can create and update a recovery VM on a host that is in a cluster. See VMware Clusters for more information.

VMware Standard Recovery Types While performing the restore procedure, you are prompted to select how to verify and recover your data to the restore destination. The following options are provided:

• Sandboxed Test Recovery • Production Recovery

Sandboxed Test Recovery is a non-destructive means for you to verify the integrity of your backed-up VMs without affecting normal business operation. Your production VMs remain powered on and operational. The selected recovery VMs are powered on within an isolated VLAN. Production Recovery performs an instant recovery of your production VMs with selected recovery VMs. If the production VM is still running, it is shut down before powering up the recovery VMs.

Restoring VMware QuickSpin To restore a VMware QuickSpin backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 229 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click VMware QuickSpin.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 230 The Select page is displayed.

4. In the Current Selection pane, select the VMs and revisions to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the VM displays more revisions of the VM.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 231 Your selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

5. Click Next.

The Recovery Type page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 232 Notes:

• Use Sandboxed test recovery as a non-destructive means for you to verify the integrity of your backed-up VMs without affecting normal business operation. Your production VMs remain powered on and operational. The selected recovery VMs are powered on within an isolated VLAN.

Use Production recovery to perform an instant recovery of your production VMs with selected recovery VMs. If still running, the production VM is shut down before powering up the recovery VMs.

6. Select a Restore type radio button.

If you select Sandboxed Test Recovery (default option):

• The source/production VMs are not shut down. • The recovery VMs selected are started on their own separate VLAN to avoid conflicts with the production VMs. • Backups to the recovery VMs do not continue if the recovery VMs are powered on.

If you select Production Recovery:

• The source/production VMs are shut down. • The recovery VMs selected are started on the production network. They assume the role of the original production VMs. • Backups to the recovery VMs do not continue if the recovery VMs are powered on.

7. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 233 The Summary page is displayed. Note: For this example, the Production Recovery option is displayed.

Notes:

• If necessary, power off non-critical VMs at the destination so enough resources are available to start the recovery VMs. • If the VMs selected for restore are currently being backed up, the backup of the VMs are canceled to allow the restore to proceed.

8. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

If you selected Production Recovery at the Destination page, then the following confirmation pop-up is displayed.

By checking the checkbox and selecting Yes, the currently running Production VM(s) are shut down and replaced by the VMware QuickSpin VMs you have selected to restore.

9. Click the Yes, restore the selected VM(s) check box, and then click Yes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 234 If you selected Sandboxed Test Recovery at the Destination page, then the following confirmation pop-up is displayed.

10. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed the latest restore.

11. Add the Recovery VMs to an existing backup set or create a new one to ensure that the newly recovered VMs are protected. 12. Remove the original Production VMs from the backup sets to avoid unnecessary errors.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 235

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 236 PART VII. SQL SERVER BACKUP AND RESTORE This chapter includes the following topics:

• SQL Server Backup • SQL Server Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. SQL Server Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Backing Up a SQL Server • Editing SQL Server Backup Sets • Removing SQL Server Backup Sets • Deleting SQL Server Backup Data

Backing up a SQL Server To back up a SQL Server, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 237 2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click SQL Server.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 238 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one the following options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

The selection is highlighted.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 239 6. At the SQL Servers section, click the Discover SQL Servers button.

The following Stop button is displayed.

7. Optionally, click the Exclude databases subsequently added to the server after backup creation check box.

The SQL databases are displayed in the Current Selection pane.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 240 8. To add a new SQL Server instance on the network, perform the following steps.

Add a New SQL Server Instance

To add a new server instance, at the Address field, type the IP address of the

server you want to add, and then click the add button.

The new server address is displayed in the Current Selection pane.

9. Click the arrow icon to display the SQL server folders available for backup.

The authentication pop-up is displayed.

10. Provide your credentials, and then click OK.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 241 The SQL databases available for backup are displayed.

11. Click the radio button of the SQL databases you would like to back up, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 242 The Schedule page is displayed.

12. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• The default is nightly with once a week being a full. • Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap).

13. Select the method, Differential or Full, by which you would like to back up your server. 14. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 243 The Retention page is displayed.

15. Select the number of days and versions you wish to archive.

Note: The default is 4 recoverable versions of backups at the destination retained for no fewer than 4 weeks.

16. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

17. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 244 The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

18. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 19. To run copy-only backups of the selected servers, select the Take copy-only backups check box.

Note: These backups require a full backup each time but do not truncate the transaction logs or affect the production SQL server.

20. After making your selections, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 245 21. Verify your selections, and then click Create Backup Set.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the latest backup set.

Editing SQL Server Backup Sets To edit a SQL Server backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 246 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 247 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Backing Up a SQL Server for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules.

5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 248 Removing SQL Server Backup Sets To remove a SQL Server backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Backing Up a SQL Server for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 249 Deleting SQL Server Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored.

To delete SQL Server backup data, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 250 The Delete Backup page is displayed.

4. Select the row of the server you want to delete.

The backed-up SQL databases and revisions are displayed in the Current Selection panel.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 251 Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more databases.

Your selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

5. After making your selections, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Click the Yes button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 252 Chapter 2. Restoring a SQL Server Backup To restore a SQL Server, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click SQL Server.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 253 The Select page is displayed.

4. In the Current Selection pane, click the radio button of the backup set you would like to restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 254 The selection is displayed in the right pane.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more databases.

5. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 255 The Destination page is displayed.

6. At the Path field, type or browse to the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 7. Click the restore name to provide a new name for the restore database or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 8. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 256 The Summary screen is displayed.

9. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

10. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 257

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 258 PART VIII. PHYSICAL IMAGING STANDARD BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Physical Imaging Standard Backup • Physical Imaging Standard Restores

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Physical Imaging Standard Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Physical Imaging Standard Backup Overview • Creating Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets • Editing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets • Removing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets • Deleting Physical Imaging Standard Revisions • Physical Imaging Standard Delete Options

Physical Imaging Standard Backup Overview To protect against user error, disk, or total system failure, you can back up and protect all local NTFS volumes, including system/boot, to a local and/or cloud storage destination. The backup agent lets you back up servers, desktops, or laptops as volume-level images. A once, daily backup is the default schedule for a Physical Imaging Standard backup set. You also have the options of creating a recurring interval schedule, or schedule by date and time.

Backups run using the standard calendar scheduler. If a backup runs into its next start time, it finishes and resumes at the next scheduled time. See Backup Schedules for more information.

Requirement: A backup agent must be installed on each physical machine that needs protection. Volume capacity limits Physical Imaging Standard supports volumes up to 64 TB.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 259 Volume Service The Physical Imaging feature uses volume shadow copy service (VSS) to quiesce the system on backup. All VSS writers are involved in this process. Ensure the writers are in a correct state before running a backup.

Creating Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets To create a Physical Imaging Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 260 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Physical Imaging Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 261 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 262 The selection is highlighted, and the volumes are displayed in the Current Selection pane.

Requirements

You are required to select at least one volume. The boot volume group being the exception. The system and boot volumes must be selected together, as a group. They are backed up and restored together, and one cannot succeed unless the other one also succeeds.

Physical Imaging backups and their revisions may be stored to a local vault. Valid local vaults are:

- Direct attached storage

- Network attached storage

- Removable storage

The following local vault locations cannot be selected for backup:

- Volumes with non-NTFS file systems

Important: Because you are backing up the full volume, ensure that you have enough local storage space for a full backup of each selected volume (it should be roughly equal to the used size of the volume) and any incremental changes.

6. In the Current Selection pane, select the volumes you would like to back up.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more volumes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 263 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

Requirements: The following volume sets cannot be selected for backup:

- Volumes with non-NTFS file systems (Unless the System volume is part of the Boot Volumes group.)

- Remote volumes /mapped network drives

- Volumes that are already included in a Physical Imaging backup set (grayed-out).

- Removable media.

- Volumes that are encrypted and locked.

- Local Only/Online and Local backup sets, and volumes that include the Local Vault location.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 264 Notes:

• The boot volumes group allows easy selection of any volume required to perform a restore of the physical system as a functional virtual machine or as VHD/X. • Hovering over an available selection displays its capacity and spaced used, as shown below.

• Hovering over an unavailable volume, displays its status, as shown below.

This hover message displays because the volume is included in another backup set.

• You cannot select removable media for backup. If attempted, the following error message is displayed.

7. After selecting the volumes/revisions, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 265 The Schedule page is displayed.

8. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• The default schedule is every day @ 11:00 PM and backups are allowed to finish before starting the next schedule occurrence. • Multiple weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • Hourly recurrences cannot be mixed with daily/weekly recurrences • Only one hourly schedule can be configured.

9. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 266 The Retention page is displayed.

10. Select the number of versions you wish to archive and the number of days to retain.

Note: The default retains 4 recoverable versions of backups for 28 days.

11. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

Example: The setting of a daily backup kept for 30 days and no fewer than 10 versions mean that 30 versions are kept. However, a setting of once a week means that after 10 weeks, 10 versions are kept.

12. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 267 The Advanced page is displayed.

13. At the Force Full Backups section, specify how often full backups are performed after incremental backups.

Note: The range is from 1 to 60 backups. The default is every 21st incremental backup.

14. At the Copy Mode section, select or clear the Take Copy Mode Backups check box, and then click Next.

Note: The Take Copy Mode Backups checkbox is selected by default. Copy Mode backups do not automatically truncate Exchange or SQL transaction logs. If you are taking a physical image of an Exchange or SQL server and want the Physical Imaging Standard backup set to truncate the logs, disable Copy Mode. If you already are backing up Exchange or SQL using another method (such as through the backup agent or directly via Exchange or SQL), then keep Copy Mode enabled.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 268 The Summary page is displayed.

15. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The scheduled backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 269 Editing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets To edit a Physical Imaging Standard backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 270 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 271 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Creating Physical Imaging Standard Backups Sets for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name can be edited on any page. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules.

5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the current backup status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 272 Removing Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets To remove a Physical Imaging Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Physical Imaging Standard Backup Sets for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 273 3. Optionally select the Delete the volume(s) from the cloud and local vault check box, and then click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting Physical Imaging Standard Revisions CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged immediately and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete the data of a Physical Imaging Standard revision, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 274 The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select Physical Imaging Standard.

The Delete Backup page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 275 4. Select the check box of the volume/revision you want to delete.

The selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

5. When satisfied with your selection, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Select the check box of one of the options. See Physical Imaging Standard Delete Options for more information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 276 7. Click the Delete button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

Physical Imaging Standard Delete Options Physical Imaging Standard backup sets use deduplication and block-level processing. For these backup sets, the following options are available on the Delete Selection screen:

• Retain backup data for 7 days • Delete all deduplication data

Retain Backup Data for 7 Days By selecting the Retain backup data for 7 days check box, you can retain deleted data for deduplication purposes for seven days. At the end of seven days, this data is deleted.

This option is useful if you are using Physical Imaging Standard on this machine and would like to use the existing blocks for de-duplication purposes. At the end of 7 days, this data will be deleted.

Delete All Deduplication Data By selecting the Delete all deduplication data check box, you can immediately delete any deduplication data not being used. This option forces a block-level cleanup when the delete finishes. This option is useful if you do not want to use existing blocks for de-duplication purposes anymore and you want to delete them immediately. Note: You cannot select both check boxes at the same time; selecting one disables the other.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 277

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 278 Chapter 2. Physical Imaging Standard Restores This chapter includes the following topics:

• Restoring to VHD/X Files • Restoring to Hyper-V Virtual Machine • Restoring via Bare Metal Recovery

Restoring to VHD/X Files This section includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring Physical Imaging Standard Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files

Overview VHD/X is the virtual hard disk file type used by Microsoft’s Hyper-V hypervisor. This restore type restores a VHD/X for each volume that you select. The backup agent produces the following files depending on the format that the user chooses:

• VHD: Windows 7, Windows 2008, Windows 2008 R2 • VHDX: Windows 8, Windows 8.1, , Windows 2012, Windows 2012 R2, Windows 2016

All virtual hard disks are recovered as dynamic disks.

Virtual hard disks take the following naming convention by default: Recovery_{machinename}_{volume or volume group label} Example: Recovery_LT-R9RLN75_Boot You can attach the Hyper-V disks (VHD files) that are restored to an existing VM.

Restore Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files To restore Physical Imaging Standard volumes/revisions to VHD/X Files, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 279 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Physical Imaging Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 280 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the VHD/X Files radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 281 The Physical Imaging Standard revisions and volumes are displayed.

5. In the Current Selection pane, select the revision and/or volumes you would like to restore.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions/volumes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 282 The selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections

6. After making your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

7. At the Type section, select either the VHDX Files or the VHD Files radio button. 8. At the Destination Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 9. After selecting the destination of the restore, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

10. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 283 The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

11. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

Restoring to Hyper-V Virtual Machine This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restore to a Hyper-V Virtual Machine

Overview When you perform a Hyper-V Virtual Machine restore, you are presented with the following recovery options for the Hyper-V VM you are creating:

• Sandboxed test recovery • Production recovery

Sandboxed Test Recovery Sandboxed test recovery is useful during tests or demonstrations because a recovery VM that is disconnected from the production network is created. This option ensures the production system’s network connectivity is not interrupted by the test restore.

Production Recovery Production recovery is used to minimize downtime during a disaster. The recovered VM can be set to connect to a user-defined external virtual switch. This feature ensures that the recovered VM is connected to the appropriate network when powered on.

Restore to a Hyper-V Virtual Machine To restore Physical Imaging Standard to a Hyper-V Virtual Machine, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 284 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Physical Imaging Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 285 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Virtual Machine radio button.

Note: This option is available only if the boot volumes group has been backed up.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 286 The revisions and volumes are displayed.

5. In the Current Selection pane, select the volumes and revisions to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders. The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

6. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 287 The Destination page is displayed.

Notes:

• Use Sandboxed test recovery to verify your backed-up Physical Images or Virtual Disks without affecting normal business operation. This option creates a VM that is not connected to the production network. Sandboxed Test Recovery is a non-destructive means for you to verify the integrity of your backed-up images without affecting normal business operation. Your production images remain powered on and operational. • Use Production recovery if your production machine has gone down. Production Recovery performs a recovery of your production images with selected recovery images.

7. Select a Restore type radio button.

If you select Sandboxed test recovery: The recovery VMs created start on their own separate VLAN to avoid conflicts with the production VMs. If you select Production recovery: A new VM is created in Hyper-V with the network, you selected.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 288 Note: For this example, the Production Recovery option is displayed, as shown below. The following steps are valid for the Sandboxed test recovery option as well, except for the Virtual Switch field.

8. At the Destination panel, select the radio button for the desired destination host.

Note: Ensure that all user accounts and computer accounts involved in the restore are members of the same domain and are set as Trusted for Delegation in the . The user account running the backup agent service must be in the Administrators group and have DCOM remote access permissions enabled on the Hyper-V host.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 289 Add New Host

a. If you need to add a new destination host, click the Add New Host button.

The Server IP Address pop-up is displayed.

b. Type the IP address of the Hyper-V host, and then click OK.

The sign-in pop-up is displayed.

c. Sign in, and then click OK.

The Select File Destination path field is activated. See Browsing to a Folder.

Notes:

• The File Destination is where virtual disks are created on the selected host as part of the restore process. • For best performance, set the File Destination on the selected Hyper-V host. The Hyper-V Machine Management service must have access to this location.

9. At the Select File Destination Path field, type or browse to the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 10. At the Specify Details for Firmware pane, select BIOS or UEFI radio button. 11. If you selected BIOS, then at the Specify Details for Type, select VHDX Files or VHD Files radio button. 12. If you selected UEFI, then the VHDX Files radio automatically button is selected. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 290 13. Select the CPU and the RAM size. 14. If you selected the Production Recovery option, select the Virtual Switch. 15. After making your selections, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

16. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

17. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 291 Restoring via Bare Metal Recovery This section includes the following topics:

• Overview • Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File • Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive • Running Recovery Media • Adding Missing Drivers

Overview Bare Metal Recovery (BMR) allows you to restore a physical image to either a similar or a dissimilar physical machine. You can create the Recovery Media as a USB thumb drive or create the Recovery Media as an .ISO file. The following tasks are performed using BMR: 1. Downloading the BMR Media Creator. 2. Downloading and installing Microsoft ADK is required to create the pre-installation media required to perform a bare metal recovery. 3. Running recovery media creator generates the Recovery Media restore. 4. Running the Recovery Media restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 292 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File To download the Recovery Media Creator, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

2. Select the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the Download BMR Media Creator icon.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 293 The Download Recovery Media Creator screen is displayed.

4. Click the Download button.

The Recovery Media Creator zip file is downloaded to your Downloads folder.

5. Open the Recovery Media Creator zip file and run the Recovery Media Creator executable (.exe).

The Windows Component Required screen is displayed, if Windows 8.1 ADK is not installed.

6. Click the link, download, and then install ADK.

Note: Ensure that the Deployment Tools and Windows PE check boxes are selected. Save disk space by deselecting the other options.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 294 7. Click the Close button.

The Recovery Media options screen is displayed.

8. Select the ISO File radio button, and then click Next.

The Platform options screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 295 9. Select the recovery media platform’s radio button.

• Select x86 in most circumstances, unless you are restoring to a machine that boots in UEFI mode, or whose hardware supports only 64-bit drivers. • Select x64 if you are restoring to a machine that boots in UEFI mode, or whose hardware supports only 64-bit drivers.

Note: It is recommended to create recovery media for each platform, so you are covered in both cases at restore time. Check the hardware vendor’s website to determine if their hardware supports only x64.

10. Click Next.

The Path screen is displayed.

11. Select the Browse button and choose the folder location.

The Next button is activated.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 296 12. Click the Next button.

The Create screen is displayed.

13. Click the Create button.

The progress screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 297 After the Recovery Media is created, the following screen is displayed.

14. Click the Close button, and then burn the .ISO file to a DVD. 15. Use the DVD to boot the recovery machine to begin a Bare Metal Restore.

Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive To download the Recovery Media Creator, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 298 2. Select the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the Download BMR Media Creator icon.

The Download Recovery Media Creator screen is displayed.

4. Click the Download button.

The Recovery Media Creator zip file is downloaded to your Downloads folder.

5. Open the Recovery Media Creator zip file and run the Recovery Media Creator executable (.exe).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 299 The Recovery Media options screen is displayed.

6. Select the USB Flash Drive radio button, and then click Next.

The Drive Destination screen is displayed.

7. Type the drive destination and click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 300 CAUTION! The following caution is displayed advising you to back up all the data before it is erased.

8. Back up the data, and then click the Create button.

The Progress screen is displayed.

After the Recovery Media is created, the following screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 301 9. Click the Close button, and then boot your recovery machine from this USB flash drive to begin a bare-metal restore.

Running Recovery Media To run the Recovery Media, perform the following steps. 1. Boot the recovery machine from the disk or flash drive to start the recovery application.

The Start Recovery Wizard screen is displayed.

2. Click Start Recovery Wizard.

The log in screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 302 3. Type your credentials, select the Computer ID, and then click the Login button. Note: If you have a private key associated to your computer, you are prompted to enter it.

The SelectBackup Set Type screen is displayed.

4. Select thePhysical Imaging Standard radio button, and then click Next.

Note: To restore from a secondary catalog, click the Restore From Secondary Catalog button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 303 The Select Recovery Volumes screen is displayed.

5. Select the volumes and the revisions to be restored.

The selections are displayed in the right pane. Note: The latest version of a volume is selected for restore by default. You can restore older versions of volumes by clicking on the volume name and selecting the revision in the Select Revision box.

6. Click the Next button.

If the backup was online only, the recovery media takes the blocks directly from the Cloud. If the backup was online & local or local only, the Local Vault Location is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 304 Note: If the backup was local only, you must select the path for Local vault. If the backup was online & local, you can click Cancel to advance to the Map Recovery Volumes to Target Disks page.

7. Select the Local Vault location of your source machine’s image backups, and then click OK.

The Map Recovery Volumes to Target Disks screen is displayed.

Important The automatic option erases all data on the target machine. You can retain data using the manual option, but as a best practice it is recommended to back up any data to be kept on the

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 305 target machine before starting a bare metal restore. Ensure that the disk has enough space to store those volumes.

8. To automatically restore all selected volumes to the target machine’s disk, select the Automatic radio button. 9. To manually create volumes on the target machine, select the Manual radio button.

The manual fields are displayed.

10. For manual restore, click the Disk Management button and then, select which source volume to restore to which target volume. Note: This option allows for more flexibility upon restore (for example, you can restore a source volume as a larger target volume; or change the layout of volumes across disks). Note: If WinPE cannot recognize the target machine’s disks and the target machine is using a RAID controller, you are asked to supply the RAID controller driver. 11. Click the Start Recovery button to begin the restore.

The Recovery Progress and Logs screen is displayed.

12. Click the View Action Logs button to observe progress.

When successfully restored, the following message is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 306 After the restore is completed without errors, chkdsk runs automatically.

13. Check the boot volume for errors and attempt to fix them, and then click Exit. 14. If you are restoring volumes to a machine with dissimilar hardware, inject missing drivers by rebooting the machine or clicking the Add Missing Drivers button. 15. Click the Restart button to boot from the recovered volumes.

Adding Missing Drivers To add missing drivers, perform the following steps. 1. Boot the recovery machine from the disk or flash drive to start the recovery application.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 307 The Start Recovery Wizard and Add Missing Drivers screen is displayed.

2. If the machine does not boot because of a driver issue, after a BMR, click Add Drivers to Recovered Machine.

The Missing Drivers screen is displayed.

3. Click the Choose Driver Files button, select missing drivers, and then click the Inject button.

The drivers are added.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 308 PART IX. PHYSICAL IMAGING RAPID RECOVERY BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Physical Imaging Backup • Physical Imaging Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Overview • Creating Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backups • Editing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets • Removing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets • Deleting Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Data

Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Overview To protect against user error, disk, or total system failure, you can back up and protect all local NTFS volumes, including system/boot, to a local storage destination. The backup agent lets you back up servers, desktops, or laptops as volume-level Physical Imaging locally. A once, daily backup is the default schedule for a Physical Imaging backup set. You also have the options of creating a recurring interval schedule, or schedule by calendar date and time.

Backups run using the standard calendar scheduler. If a backup runs into its next start time, it finishes and resumes at the next scheduled time. See Backup Schedules for more information.

Requirement: An agent must be installed on each physical machine that needs protection. Volume capacity limits When you perform a backup, the Physical Imaging is stored locally, uncompressed, and unencrypted so you must ensure that enough disk space is available. You can also store revisions. See Backup Agent Software Requirements.

The agent cannot back up volumes over two TB on Windows 7, 2008, and 2011. For newer operating systems (Server 2008 R2/SBS 2011/Server 2012/2012 R2), this limit is 64 TB. Volume Shadow Copy Service

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 309 The Physical Imaging feature uses volume shadow copy service (VSS) to quiesce the system on backup. All VSS writers are involved in this process. Ensure the writers are in a correct state before running a backup.

Creating Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backups To create a Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 310 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 311 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location Path field, type or browse to the destination of the backup. See Browsing to a Folder.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 312 Requirements

Physical Imaging backups and their revisions must be stored locally. Valid local storage locations are:

- Direct attached storage

- Network attached storage

- Removable storage

The following local storage locations cannot be selected for backup:

- Volumes with non-NTFS file systems

Important: Because you are backing up the full volume, ensure that you have enough local storage space for a full backup of each selected volume (it should be roughly equal to the used size of the volume) and any incremental changes.

6. In the Current Selection pane, select the volumes you would like to back up.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more volumes. The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 313 Restrictions: The following volume sets cannot be selected for backup:

- Volumes with non-NTFS file systems (Unless the System volume is part of the Boot Volumes group.)

- Remote volumes /mapped network drives

- Volumes that are already included in a Physical Imaging backup set (grayed-out).

- Removable media.

- Volumes that are encrypted and locked.

- Local Only/Online and Local backup sets, and volumes that include the Local Vault location.

Notes:

• The boot volumes group allows easy selection of any volume required to perform a restore of the physical system as a functional virtual machine or as VHD/X. • Hovering over an available selection displays its capacity and spaced used, as shown below.

• Hovering over an unavailable volume, displays its status, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 314 • You cannot select removable media for backup. If attempted, the following error message is displayed.

7. After selecting the volumes/revisions, click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

8. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• A once daily backup is the default schedule for a Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery backup set. • Multiple weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • Hourly and daily recurrences cannot be mixed with weekly recurrences • Only one daily or hourly schedule can be configured.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 315 9. After setting the schedule, click Next.

The Retention page is displayed.

Note: The default backup runs 7 days a week, retaining 7 versions of the backup.

10. Select the number of versions you wish to archive, and then click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 316 11. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 12. After selecting the destination of the restore, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

13. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The schedule backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 317 Editing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets To edit a Physical Imaging backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 318 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 319 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Creating Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backups for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name can be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 320 • The Storage Location Destination can be changed after creation. However, to restore files, the old destination must be moved to the new location. When the storage location is changed the following pop-up is displayed:

5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the current backup status.

Removing Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Sets To remove a Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backups for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 321 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Optionally select the Delete the volume(s) from the backup destination check box, and then click Yes.

Note: VMs in active recovery are not deleted. The backup set is removed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 322 Deleting Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete a Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 323 The Delete Volume page is displayed.

4. Select the row of the volume you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 324 The selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

Note: Delete removes all revisions. You cannot delete specific revisions.

5. When satisfied with your selections, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Click the Yes button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 325

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 326 Chapter 2. Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Rapid Recovery • Rapid Recovery Restore • VHD/VHDX File Restore • Object-level Restore • Bare Metal Recovery Restore

Rapid Recovery This section includes the following topics:

• Rapid Recovery Restore Overview • Managing Rapid Recoveries

Rapid Recovery Restore Overview Rapid Recovery is a restore option that allows you to recover a failed system as a Hyper-V virtual machine in fifteen minutes or less from local storage. Rapid Recovery is available at no additional cost to any partner who has run an image backup of the source machine’s boot volume. After you select Rapid Recovery, two recovery settings are displayed:

• Sandboxed test recovery • Production recovery

Sandboxed Test Recovery Sandboxed test recovery is useful during tests or demonstrations because a recovery VM that is disconnected from the production network is created. This option ensures the production system’s network connectivity is not interrupted by the test restore.

Production Recovery Production recovery is used to minimize downtime during a disaster. The recovered VM can be set to connect to a user-defined external virtual switch. This feature ensures that the recovered VM is connected to the appropriate network when powered on.

Managing Rapid Recoveries After performing a Rapid Recovery, if the Manage Recovery action is not performed, you cannot run a backup/restore for the volumes that were restored using the Rapid Recovery type. Active Recoveries can be viewed at the Computer’s Active Recoveries page. See Managing an Active Recovery for Production Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 327 The following table displays the status you can view for each recovery VM.

Column What is Displayed VM Name Recovery VM’s name. Host/Location IP address of the host running the recovery VM. Recovery Mode Recovery mode (sandboxed test or production). Start Time Time the Rapid Recovery restore was initiated. Runtime Uptime of the recovery VM. Actions Manage Recovery button that allows you to finalize or cancel a recovery.

Managing an Active Recovery for Production Recovery To manage an active recovery, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Active Recoveries tab, and then click the Manage Recovery button, as shown in the example below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 328 The Manage Active Recovery page is displayed.

2. To finalize recovery, click the Finalize Recovery radio button.

Note: The Finalize Recovery option completes the active recovery process and optimizes the performance of the recovery VM.

3. Optionally, click the Browse button, and then select the file destination for the VM’s restored virtual hard disk. 4. Optionally, type a name for the VM in the VM Name field. 5. To cancel recovery, click the Cancel Recovery radio button.

Note: If the VM was created as a sandboxed test or production recovery, you can cancel the recovery. This action powers off and deletes the recovery VM. Any files created as a part of the test restore are removed from the user-defined location and the recovery VM is deleted from the selected host’s inventory.

6. Ensure the differencing disks are not mounted or in use by any powered-on VM, or the delete operation fails. 7. Select the Delete VM changes made during recovery mode and resume backup schedule check box.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 329 If enabled, the following occurs:

• Any changes made to this VM or its disks while in recovery mode are lost. • The differencing disks created during recovery are deleted. • The recovery VM is powered off and deleted. • All files created as a part of the test restore are removed from the user-defined location. • The recovery VM is deleted from the selected host’s inventory.

Managing an Active Recovery for Sandbox Recovery To manage an active recovery, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Active Recoveries tab, and then click the Manage Recovery button, as shown in the example below.

The End test recovery and delete changes page is displayed.

2. Ensure the differencing disks are not mounted or in use by any powered-on VM, or the delete operation fails. 3. Select the Delete VM changes made during recovery mode and resume backup schedule check box.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 330 If enabled, the following occurs:

• Any changes made to this VM or its disks while in recovery mode are lost. • The differencing disks created during recovery are deleted. • The recovery VM is powered off and deleted. • All files created as a part of the test restore are removed from the user-defined location. • The recovery VM is deleted from the selected host’s inventory.

Rapid Recovery Restore To restore using Rapid Recovery, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 331 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 332 The Select page is displayed with Rapid Recovery selected as the default.

In the Current Selection pane, the boot volume is selected by default (it is grayed out).

4. Select any other volumes and revisions to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 333 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

5. After making your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 334 Notes:

• Use Sandboxed test recovery to verify your backed-up Physical Images or Virtual Disks without affecting normal business operation. This option creates a VM that is not connected to the production network. Sandboxed Test Recovery is a non-destructive means for you to verify the integrity of your backed-up images without affecting normal business operation. Your production images remain powered on and operational. • Use Production recovery if your production machine has gone down. Production Recovery performs a recovery of your production images with selected recovery images.

6. Select a Restore type radio button.

If you select Sandboxed test recovery:

• The source/production images are not shut down. • The recovery VMs created are started on their own separate VLAN to avoid conflicts with the production VMs.

If you select Production recovery:

• The source/production VMs are shut down. • The recovery VMs selected are started on the production network. They assume the role of the original production machines.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 335 Note: For this example, the Production Recovery option is displayed, as shown below. The following steps are valid for the Sandboxed test recovery option as well, except for the Virtual Switch field.

7. At the Select Destination Host for VM pane, click the Add New Host button.

The Server IP Address pop-up is displayed.

8. Type the IP address of the Hyper-V host, and then click OK.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 336 The sign-in pop-up is displayed.

9. Sign in, and then click OK. 10. At the Specify details for Host VM panel, select the CPU and the RAM size. 11. If you selected the Production Recovery option, select the Virtual Switch. 12. At the Path field, type or browse to the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder.

Notes:

• The File Destination is where differencing disks are created on the selected host as part of the restore process. • For best performance, set the File Destination on the selected Hyper-V host. The Hyper-V Machine Management service must have access to this location. • If you select a remote host and the backup destination is a local non-shared folder, the following pop-up is displayed asking to share the backup destination. Canceling this pop-up deselects the remote host.

13. After selecting the destination of the restore, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 337 The Summary page is displayed.

14. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

15. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status and a record is created in the Active Recovery tab, as shown below.

If the Manage Recovery action is not performed, you cannot run a backup/restore for the volumes that were restored using Rapid Recovery type.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 338 Restoring to VHD/X Files This section includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files

Overview VHD/VHDX is the virtual hard disk file type used by Microsoft’s Hyper-V hypervisor. This restore type restores a VHD/X for each volume that you select. The agent produces the following files depending on the operating system on which it is installed:

• VHD: Windows 7, Windows 2008, Windows 2008 R2 • VHDX: Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 2012, Windows 2012 R2, Windows 2016

All virtual hard disks are recovered as dynamic disks. Virtual hard disks take the following naming convention by default: Recovery_{machine_name}_{volume or volume group label} Example: Recovery_LT-R9RLN75_Boot You can restore to another system if the OS version is different; however, this only works if the change represents an upgrade. For instance, you can back up Windows 7 and restore on Windows 8 but not vise-versa. You can attach the Hyper-V disks (VHD files) that are restored to an existing VM.

Restoring Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Volumes/Revisions to VHD/X Files To restore VHD/VHDX Files, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 339 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 340 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the VHD/X files radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 341 The Restore VHD/X Files page is displayed.

5. In the Current Selection pane, select the revision and/or volumes you would like to restore.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions/volumes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 342 The selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections

6. After making your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

7. At the Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 8. After selecting the destination of the restore, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 343 The Summary page is displayed.

9. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

10. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

Object-level Restore This section includes the following topics:

• Object-level Restore Overview • Restoring at the Object-level

Object-level Restore Overview At the Object-level, you can browse all the files of the volumes that you backed up and select individual files from those volumes to restore. This feature allows you to recover individual files and folders from a local Physical Imaging backup directly through the management portal. This granular restore of data is performed without having to explicitly mount the disks and display their contents with Windows explorer.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 344 Restoring at the Object-level To restore at the Object-level, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 345 The Select page is displayed.

4. Select the Object-level Restore radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 346 The Object-level selections are displayed.

5. In the Current Selection pane, select the revisions/volumes to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions/volumes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 347 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

6. Click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

7. At the Destination section, to select the original destination path, click the Original Path radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 348 8. To select an alternate path, click the Alternate Path radio button, and then browse to the destination. See Browsing to a Folder. 9. At the Restore Options section, select your preferences. 10. At the Existing Files section, select one of the following radio buttons regarding the restoration of existing files:

• Do not overwrite any existing files with restored files • Overwrite existing files with restored files • If a file already exists, rename the restored file

11. After making your selections, click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

12. Optionally, select the following options to specify the advanced features of the restore:

• Restore NTFS File Permissions • Restore File Attributes • Restore Last Modified Date

13. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 349 The Summary page is displayed.

14. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

15. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

Restoring via Bare Metal Recovery This section includes the following topics:

• Overview • Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File • Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive • Running Recovery Media • Adding Missing Drivers

Overview Bare Metal Recovery (BMR) allows you to restore a physical image to either a similar or a dissimilar physical machine. You can create the Recovery Media as a USB thumb drive or create the Recovery Media as an .ISO file.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 350 The following tasks are performed using BMR: 1. Downloading the BMR Media Creator. 2. Downloading and installing Microsoft ADK is required to create the pre-installation media required to perform a bare metal recovery. 3. Running recovery media creator generates the Recovery Media restore. 4. Running the Recovery Media restore.

Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as an ISO File To download the Recovery Media Creator, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

2. Select the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 351 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the Download BMR Media Creator icon.

The Download Recovery Media Creator screen is displayed.

4. Click the Download button.

The Recovery Media Creator zip file is downloaded to your Downloads folder.

5. Open the Recovery Media Creator zip file and run the Recovery Media Creator executable (.exe).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 352 The Windows Component Required screen is displayed, if Windows 8.1 ADK is not installed.

6. Click the link, download, and then install ADK.

Note: Ensure that the Deployment Tools and Windows PE check boxes are selected. Save disk space by deselecting the other options.

7. Click the Close button.

The Recovery Media options screen is displayed.

8. Select the ISO File radio button, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 353 The Platform options screen is displayed.

9. Select the recovery media platform’s radio button.

• Select x86 in most circumstances, unless you are restoring to a machine that boots in UEFI mode, or whose hardware supports only 64-bit drivers. • Select x64 if you are restoring to a machine that boots in UEFI mode, or whose hardware supports only 64-bit drivers.

Note: It is recommended to create recovery media for each platform, so you are covered in both cases at restore time. Check the hardware vendor’s website to determine if their hardware supports only x64.

10. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 354 The Path screen is displayed.

11. Select the Browse button and choose the folder location.

The Next button is activated.

12. Click the Next button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 355 The Create screen is displayed.

13. Click the Create button.

The progress screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 356 After the Recovery Media is created, the following screen is displayed.

14. Click the Close button, and then burn the .ISO file to a DVD. 15. Use the DVD to boot your recovery machine to begin a Bare Metal Restore.

Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as a USB Flash Drive To download the Recovery Media Creator, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

2. Select the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 357 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the Download BMR Media Creator icon.

The Download Recovery Media Creator screen is displayed.

4. Click the Download button.

The Recovery Media Creator zip file is downloaded to your Downloads folder.

5. Open the Recovery Media Creator zip file and run the Recovery Media Creator executable (.exe).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 358 The Recovery Media options screen is displayed.

6. Select the USB Flash Drive radio button, and then click Next.

The Drive Destination screen is displayed.

7. Type the drive destination and click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 359 CAUTION! The following caution is displayed advising you to back up all the data before it is erased.

8. Back up the data, and then click the Create button.

The Progress screen is displayed.

After the Recovery Media is created, the following screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 360 9. Click the Close button, and then boot the recovery machine from this USB flash drive to begin a bare-metal restore.

Running Recovery Media To run the Recovery Media, perform the following steps. 1. Boot the recovery machine from the disk or flash drive to start the recovery application.

The Start Recovery Wizard screen is displayed.

2. Click Start Recovery Wizard.

The log in screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 361 3. Type your credentials, select the Computer ID, and then click the Login button. Note: If you have a private key associated to your computer, you are prompted to enter it. 4. The SelectBackup Set Type screen is displayed with Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery selected as the default.

5. Click Next.

Note: To restore from a secondary catalog, click the Restore From Secondary Catalog button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 362 The Select Recovery Volumes screen is displayed.

6. Select the volumes and the revisions to be restored.

The selections are displayed in the right pane. Note: The latest version of a volume is selected for restore by default. You can restore older versions of volumes by clicking on the volume name and selecting the revision in the Select Revision box.

7. Click the Next button.

If the backup was online only, the recovery media takes the blocks directly from the Cloud. If the backup was online & local or local only, the local storage location is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 363 The Map Recovery Volumes to Target Disks screen is displayed.

Important The automatic option erases all data on the target machine. You can retain data using the manual option, but as a best practice it is recommended to back up any data to be kept on the target machine before starting a bare metal restore. Ensure that the disk has enough space to store those volumes.

8. To automatically restore all selected volumes to the target machine’s disk, select the Automatic radio button. 9. To manually create volumes on the target machine, select the Manual radio button.

The manual fields are displayed.

10. For manual restore, click the Disk Management button and then, select which source volume to restore to which target volume. Note: This option allows for more flexibility upon restore (for example, you can restore a source volume as a larger target volume; or change the layout of volumes across disks). Note: If WinPE cannot recognize the target machine’s disks and the target machine is using a RAID controller, you are asked to supply the RAID controller driver. 11. Click the Start Recovery button to begin the restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 364 The Recovery Progress and Logs screen is displayed.

12. Click the View Action Logs button to observe progress.

When successfully restored, the following message is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 365 After the restore is completed without errors, chkdsk runs automatically.

13. Check the boot volume for errors and attempt to fix them, and then click Exit. 14. If you are restoring volumes to a machine with dissimilar hardware, inject missing drivers by rebooting the machine or clicking the Add Missing Drivers button. 15. Click the Restart button to boot from the recovered volumes.

Adding Missing Drivers To add missing drivers, perform the following steps. 1. Boot the recovery machine from the disk or flash drive to start the recovery application.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 366 The Start Recovery Wizard and Add Missing Drivers screen is displayed.

2. If the machine does not boot because of a driver issue, after a BMR, click Add Drivers to Recovered Machine.

The Missing Drivers screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 367 3. Click the Choose Driver Files button, select missing drivers, and then click the Inject button.

The drivers are added.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 368 PART X. HYPER-V STANDARD BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Hyper-V Standard Backup • Hyper-V Standard Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Hyper-V Standard Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Hyper-V Standard Backup Overview • Creating Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets • Editing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets • Removing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets • Deleting Hyper-V Standard Revisions • Hyper-V Standard Delete Options

Hyper-V Standard Backup Overview Hyper-V backups can be stored locally and in the cloud. When Hyper-V backups are stored locally, they are stored in a proprietary format (encrypted and compressed) and require a restore to access backed- up data. When the backup agent is installed on the Hyper-V host, it can back up any virtual machine on that host. You can select any number of virtual machines to be backed up. However, a VM can only be included in one backup set at a time. If you are backing up to the cloud, then ensure that each VM you need to back up has the most recent version of Integration Services (IS) installed. The Hyper-V host’s Integration Services also must be updated (if the host’s IS is older, then the backup fails). You can schedule a backup set to run on a recurring schedule. The default is running once per night. See Backup Schedules for more information. You can add more than one VM to a backup set, but, by default, only one virtual disk is processed at a time when the backup runs. You can change this behavior by increasing the number of concurrent Hyper-V worker threads on the System Page. Increasing the number of worker threads allows multiple disks to be backed up concurrently but may use more resources on the host.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 369 Hyper-V backups copy a full, initial backup of selected VMs. After this initial backup, incremental backups containing only the changed portions of each VM are performed until the next full backup is scheduled. Note: For Hyper-V 2016, Windows XP and Nano Server are backed up in a crash-consistent state instead of an application-consistent state.

Creating Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets To create a Hyper-V Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 370 2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Hyper-V Standard.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 371 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for your backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following radio button options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 372 The radio button you select is highlighted as shown in the example below.

6. In the Current Selection pane, select the available virtual machines you would like to back up.

Notes:

• Any VMs that already are included in other backup sets are grayed out. • A warning icon is displayed for VMs that have not been upgraded.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more VMs. Your selections are displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the VM check box.

7. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 373 The Schedule page is displayed.

8. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Backup Schedules for more information.

Notes:

• The default schedule is by the week on every day starting at 11 p.m. • Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out.

Your schedule is displayed in the Schedule column. Click the remove icon to delete schedule.

9. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 374 The Retention page is displayed.

10. Select the number of versions you wish to retain, and for how long.

Note: The default is 4 recoverable versions of backups at the storage location that are retained for 28 days.

11. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

12. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 375 The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space. Temporary space of 1 GB is recommended for Hyper-V backups.

13. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used during backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 14. At the Force Full Backups section, use the arrows to specify how often full backups are performed after incremental backups.

Notes:

• The default full backup is every 21 incremental backups. • Taking a full VM backup periodically ensures the stability of the backup chain. Full backups take longer to run but result in shorter incremental chains and potentially shorter recovery times.

15. At the Backup Mode section, optionally select the Allow Crash-Consistent Backups check box.

CAUTION! Crash-consistent backups do not preserve the integrity of data for open files of transactional applications on the VM guest OS and may result in data loss.

Definitions: A crash-consistent backup captures all the virtual machine's data at the same time.

An application-consistent backup captures all the data including the data in memory and all transactions in process.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 376 Note: The software attempts to make an application-consistent backup. If unable, a crash-consistent backup is created

Pre-Windows Server 2016 versions display a different backup mode option as shown below.

When enabled, the virtual machine may become unavailable during the snapshot process.

The software attempts an online backup first. If unable, an offline backup is created. The virtual machine is paused and put into a saved state while the snapshot is taken, and then the virtual machine resumes operation. VMs in a saved or a paused state can be backed up. The imported recovery VMs are in a saved state in both cases.

Tip: This mode is useful if an online backup cannot be taken. For instance, if the guest VM has dynamic disks, this mode allows guest VMs to be backed up in a non-quiesced, offline state.

16. Click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 377 17. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

Your scheduled backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

Editing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets To edit a Hyper-V Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 378 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Set row, click the edit icon of the backup type.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 379 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit your current settings. See Creating Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets for details.

Note: The backup set name may be edited on any page. See Changing Backup Set Names.

5. After making all your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with your current backup status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 380 Removing Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets To remove a Hyper-V Standard backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Hyper-V Standard Backup Sets for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 381 Note: By default, deleting the backup set does not delete the VMs from the cloud or local vault. Deleting the backup set only stops backing up the VMs contained in this backup set.

3. Optionally select the Delete all backed-up data from the cloud and local vault that are associated with this backup set check box.

CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. Note: It is recommended to select this option to free up disk space by deleting unnecessary data.

4. After making your selection, click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting Hyper-V Standard Revisions CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete a Hyper-V Standard revision, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 382 The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

The Delete page is displayed.

4. Select the check box of the VM you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 383 The selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

5. When satisfied with your selection, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Select the check box of one of the options. See Hyper-V Standard Delete Options for more information. 7. Click the Delete button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 384 Hyper-V Standard Delete Options Hyper-V Standard backup sets use deduplication and block-level processing. For these backup sets, the following options are available on the Delete Selection screen:

• Retain backup data for 7 days • Delete all deduplication data

Retain Backup Data for 7 Days By selecting the Retain backup data for 7 days check box, you can retain deleted data in your Local Vault and the cloud for deduplication purposes for seven days. At the end of seven days, this data is deleted.

This option is useful if you are backing up VMs on this machine and would like to use the existing blocks for de-duplication purposes.

If you choose not to select this option, the data that you have selected is deleted from the Local Vault and the cloud immediately.

Delete All Deduplication Data By selecting the Delete all deduplication data check box, you can immediately delete any deduplication data not being used. This option is useful if you do not want to use existing blocks for de-duplication purposes anymore and you want to delete them immediately. Note: You cannot select both check boxes at the same time; selecting one disables the other.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 385

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 386 Chapter 2. Hyper-V Standard Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring Hyper-V Standard Backups

Overview This section includes the following topics:

• About Restoring to a Folder • Hyper-V Manager Virtual Machines Import Options • Backup States of Imported VMs • Hyper-V Replication • Managing an Active Recovery • Restoring Hyper-V Standard Backups

About Restoring to a Folder Each VM has its own folder created within the specified restore directory. Within that folder, the VM files are created with the same folder structure as when they were backed up. All VHD/VHDX files (associated with VM disks) and the XML configuration file are restored with a VM restore. If the VM was backed up in offline mode and the memory state needed to be saved, the VM restores the associated BIN and VSV files.

Hyper-V Manager Virtual Machines Import Options Hyper-V lets you restore virtual machines to any system for import into Hyper-V or mount them as virtual disks. After you have restored your selected virtual machines, you must Import them into Hyper-V to power on and access the VMs. To access Hyper-V import options, launch Hyper-V Manager, select Import Virtual Machine, and then select the VM directory you have restored. There are three virtual machines import options in Hyper-V Manager:

• Register • Restore • Copy

Register Choose this option if the destination you selected for the recovered virtual machines are the destination you intend to run it from. The original ID of the VM is used when registering the VM with hypervisor. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 387 Restore Choose this option if the destination you selected for the recovered virtual machines are a temporary location (for example, on a share or removable drive) and you want Hyper-V to move the restored files to the appropriate location and register the virtual machines for you. The original ID of the VM is used when registering the VM with the hypervisor.

Copy Choose this option if you intend to import the recovered virtual machines multiple times (for example, you are using the virtual machines as a template for a new virtual machine). Hyper-V copies the restored files to the appropriate location for you. A new ID is generated and used to register the VM with the hypervisor. Refer to the third-party Hyper-V Manager documentation for more information.

Backup States of Imported VMs A VM is imported in a certain state depending on the state it was in when backed up. The following table provides the various backup states.

State at Time of Backup Type of Backup State after Restore Running Online Off Running Offline Saved Saved Offline Saved Paused Offline Saved Off Offline Off

Hyper-V Replication Hyper-V Replication is a feature of Hyper-V 2012 and greater versions that allows users to replicate their production VMs to a secondary host on a near-continuous schedule. If you are using Hyper-V replication, it is recommended that the agent be installed on the recovery host and backs up the recovery VMs. This method puts less load on the production server. This method also provides more data protection. Refer to the third-party Hyper-V Replication documentation for more information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 388 Managing an Active Recovery To manage an active recovery, perform the following steps. 1. At the Computer page, click the Active Recoveries tab, and then click the Manage Recovery button, as shown in the example below.

The End test recovery and delete changes page is displayed.

2. Ensure the differencing disks are not mounted or in use by any powered-on VM, or the delete operation fails.

If you end the active recovery, the following occurs:

3. Select the Delete VM changes made during recovery mode and resume backup schedule check box.

If enabled, the following occurs:

• Any changes made to this VM or its disks while in recovery mode are lost. • The differencing disks created during recovery are deleted. • The recovery VM is powered off and deleted. • All files created as a part of the test restore are removed from the user-defined location. • The recovery VM is deleted from the selected host’s inventory.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 389 Restoring Hyper-V Standard Backups To restore a Hyper-V Standard backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the backup type you want to restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 390 The Select page is displayed.

4. In the Current Selection pane, select the VMs and revisions you would like to restore.

Notes:

• You can choose only one revision to restore per selected VM. • Multiple VMs can be restored simultaneously.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 391 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

5. Click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 392 Notes:

• Upon restore, a new directory for each selected VM is created in the storage location directory and each VM's associated files are restored into their respective, created directory. • Once restored, the VM files can be imported into Hyper-V.

6. At the Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the storage location of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 7. After selecting the storage location of the restore, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

Important: Make sure to add the recovered VMs to a backup set so they are backed up properly. See Hyper-V Manager Virtual Machines Import Options for more information.

8. Optionally, for more information about restoring Hyper-V data within various environments, click the click here link.

Note: This option opens a new page in the Barracuda MSP Knowledge base that allows you to access additional information.

9. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 393 The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

10. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed showing the status of the restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 394 PART XI. HYPER-V RAPID RECOVERY BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup • Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Overview • Creating Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets • Editing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets • Removing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets • Deleting Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Revisions

Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Overview Hyper-V Rapid Recovery is a backup set type that backs up full Hyper-V VMs to local storage and allows you to recover important servers quickly.

Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backups protect VMs in a reverse incremental manner. This method allows the most recent state (and the one most likely to be recovered in a disaster) to be recovered in the shortest amount of time. In addition, this method provides a more stable revision chain and requires no scheduled consolidation. With changed block tracking and an improved recovery point objective, the rapid recovery backup set tracks changes on protected VMs efficiently. This efficiency allows you to schedule VM backups up to every 15 minutes. In case of a disaster, almost no data is lost because the most recent known good state is only a few minutes old. The backup storage location is where all the backup data (fulls and incrementals) are stored locally.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 395 Local Storage can be on the following:

• Directly attached storage location • Network share • Remote share • Standard disk (512) • 4K disk • Sparse file

When backing up a VHD disk on a 4K disk, the backup data is converted to a VHDX format. Temporary space of 1 GB is recommended for Hyper-V backups. Note: The agent must be installed on the Hyper-V host.

Creating Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets To create a Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 396 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Hyper-V Rapid Recovery.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 397 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for your backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the storage location of your backup. See Browsing to a Folder.

Important! Ensure there is enough space available to host the entire backup and its future revisions. Note: Changed locations of the destination hosts of the recovery VMs, are not changed until the next backup set is run.

6. In the Current selection pane, select the virtual machines you would like to back up.

Notes:

• Any VMs that already are included in other backup sets are grayed out.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 398 • A warning icon is displayed for VMs that have not been upgraded. • Multiple VMs can be included in the same backup set.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the VM displays more revisions of the VM. Your selections are displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

7. At the Name field, type a unique name for the backup set. See Changing Backup Set Names. 8. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 399 The Schedule page is displayed.

9. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Backup Schedules for more information.

Notes:

• The default schedule is every hour. • Multiple weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • By the minute, hourly or daily recurrences cannot be mixed with weekly recurrences. • There can only be one by the minute, hourly or daily schedule configured. • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out.

Your schedule is displayed in the Schedule column. Click the remove icon to delete schedule.

10. After setting your schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 400 The Retention page is displayed.

Notes:

• You can retain up to 99 revisions per virtual machine. With the default schedule of backing up every 1 hour and keeping 96 versions, up to 4 days of recoverable versions are retained at the storage location. • The backup set preserves the current state of the virtual machines only. User-generated snapshots are not saved.

11. Specify how many recoverable versions of backups at the storage location you would like to retain, and then click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space. Temporary space of 1 GB is recommended for Hyper-V backups.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 401 12. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used during backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 13. At the Backup Mode section, optionally select the Allow Crash-Consistent Backups check box.

CAUTION! Crash-consistent backups do not preserve the integrity of data for open files of transactional applications on the VM guest OS and may result in data loss.

Definitions: A crash-consistent backup captures all the virtual machine's data at the same time.

An application-consistent backup captures all the data including the data in memory and all transactions in process.

Notes:

• When crash-consistent backups are enabled, the virtual machine may become unavailable during the snapshot process. • The software attempts to make an application-consistent backup. If unable, a crash-consistent backup is created

Pre-Windows Server 2016 versions display a different backup mode option as shown below.

When enabled, the virtual machine may become unavailable during the snapshot process.

The software attempts an online backup first. If unable, an offline backup is created. The virtual machine is paused and put into a saved state while the snapshot is taken, and then the virtual machine resumes operation. VMs in a saved or a paused state can be backed up. The imported recovery VMs are in a saved state in both cases.

Tip: This mode is useful if an online backup cannot be taken. For instance, if the guest VM has dynamic disks, this mode allows guest VMs to be backed up in a non-quiesced, offline state.

14. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 402 The Summary page is displayed.

15. After reviewing your selections, click the Create Backup Set button.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

Your scheduled backup is displayed on the Backup Selections page.

Editing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets To edit a Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 403 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon of the backup selection to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 404 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit your current settings. See Creating Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • The Storage Location options on the Select page cannot be changed.

5. After making all your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with your current backup status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 405 Removing Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets To remove a Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backup Sets for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 406 3. Optionally, select the Delete the VM(s) from the Rapid Recovery destination check box, and then click Yes.

CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. Note: It is recommended to select this option to free up disk space by deleting unnecessary data.

4. After making your selection, click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Revisions CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete a Hyper-V Rapid Recovery revision, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 407 The Delete Backup page is displayed. CAUTION! All backup data associated with the selected VMs are deleted from local storage. Any subsequent backup needs to start with a full backup.

4. Select the check box of the VM you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 408 The selections for deletion are displayed in the right panel.

Note: Delete removes all revisions. You cannot delete specific revisions. All backup data associated with the selected VM(s) is deleted from local storage. Any subsequent backup needs to start fresh with a full backup.

5. When satisfied with your selection, click the Delete button.

The Delete Confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Click the Yes button.

The Delete Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 409

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 410 Chapter 2. Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Restore This chapter includes the following topics:

• Overview • Restoring Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backups • Restoring Hyper-V Object-level Rapid Recovery

Overview Rapid Recovery is a restore option that allows you to recover a failed system as a Hyper-V virtual machine in fifteen minutes or less from local storage. The major benefit of Hyper-V Rapid Recovery is the new set of recovery options afforded to the small business to recover from any local business outage. Each option covers specific customer use cases and insures against business downtime. These options include:

• Rapid Recovery – recovery-in-place • Rapid Recovery – object-level recovery • Copy-mode recovery

Rapid Recovery – Recovery-in-Place The main Rapid Recovery option for these backups is a recovery-in-place, in which your Hyper-V files are made available very quickly so that they can be imported into Hyper-V Manager and booted.

Rapid Recovery – Object-level Recovery This option allows you to recover individual files and folders from a customer’s local Hyper-V backup directly through the management portal. This feature allows granular restore of data in protected Hyper-V VMs without having to mount the disks and explore their contents through Windows explorer.

Copy-mode Recovery You also can do a full-copy restore of VM data to another location. This type of restore is useful for providing a more permanent recovery solution. The full contents of the VM’s disks (not just a differencing disk) are copied to a location that can serve as better permanent storage from which to run a production VM. This restore is useful for getting a copy of a VM from a certain point-in-time to either run or store elsewhere.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 411 Restoring Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Backups To restore a backup with Hyper-V Rapid Recovery, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the backup type you want to restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 412 The Select page is displayed with Rapid Recovery selected as the default.

4. In the Current Selection pane, select the VM and revisions you would like to restore.

Note: You can only choose one revision to restore per selected VM.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 413 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

5. Click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 414 Note: The following table provides a description of the restore options.

Restore Option Description Rapid Recovery of VM This option provides the fastest recovery time. A differencing disk files at the original and configuration file in the existing local storage location are storage location. created that can be imported into Hyper-V Manager. Restore all VM files to This option recovers the VMs’ files (virtual hard disks and this destination. configuration) to an alternate location. Because it performs a copy process, it takes longer. Use this option to archive a copy of your VM or to restore to a storage more suited to run the VM.

6. Select a recovery option radio button. 7. If you selected the Restore all VM files to this destination option, at the Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the storage location of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 8. After selecting the storage location of the restore, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

Important: Make sure to add the recovered VMs to a backup set so they are backed up properly. See Hyper-V Manager Virtual Machines Import Options for more information. Notes:

• Subsequent backups of the VMs selected for recovery fail if the recovery is active. To resume backups, you must end the recovery. • Subsequent restores also fail for active recoveries.

9. Optionally, for more information about restoring Hyper-V data within various environments, click the click here link.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 415 Note: This option opens a new page in the Barracuda MSP Knowledge base that allows you to access additional information.

10. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

11. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed showing the status of the restore.

Restoring Hyper-V Object-level Rapid Recovery To restore a backup at the Hyper-V Object-level, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 416 The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the backup type you want to restore.

The Select page is displayed with Rapid Recovery selected as the default.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 417 4. Select the Object-Level Restore radio button, as shown below.

5. In the Current Selection pane, select the VM, the disks, and revisions you would like to restore.

Note: You can choose only one revision to restore per selected VM.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more files and folders. The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

6. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 418 The Destination page is displayed.

7. At the Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the storage location of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 8. After selecting the storage location, click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

9. Optionally, select any of the following options to specify the advanced features of the restore:

• Restore NTFS File Permissions • Restore File Attributes • Restore Last Modified Date

10. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 419 The Summary page is displayed.

11. Verify your selections, and then click the Restore button.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

12. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed showing the status of the restore.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 420 PART XII. EXCHANGE MAILBOX LEVEL BACKUP and RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Exchange Mailbox Level Backup • Exchange Mailbox Level Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Exchange Mailbox Level Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Exchange Mailbox Level Overview • Creating Exchange Mailbox Level Backups • Editing Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Sets • Removing Exchange Mailbox Level Backups • Deleting Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Data

Exchange Mailbox Level Overview This section includes the following topics:

• Exchange Mailbox Level Features • Exchange Mailbox Level Known Issues • Exchange Mailbox Level Settings

Exchange Mailbox Level Features With Exchange Mailbox Level backups, you can:

• Use Exchange Web Services (EWS) that allows multi-threading. • Restore directly to a mail message (.msg) file or to an Outlook Personal Storage Table (.pst) file. • Run the software from any computer with web access so the agent does not need to be installed on the Exchange server.

Exchange Mailbox Level backups allow you to back up users' mailbox data for granular restores. Mailboxes, contacts, and even individual mail messages for a user can be restored on an individual basis, or in bulk, to provide flexibility in the choices you have when reinstating a user's email. Mailbox level backup sets are best used as a data-archiving utility, to keep a record of the emails sent and received (as well as contacts and calendars) over a long period. It is not recommend using mailbox level backups as a disaster recovery method because restoring an entire information store via a Mailbox Level backup is much slower than from an Information Store backup.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 421 The backup agent only supports backing up mailboxes from a single domain. If you would like to back up data from a different domain using an existing sub-account, then you need to delete the backup set and backed up data before you can edit the URL. If you would like to back up from a second domain, create a new sub-account and install the backup agent on the second system.

Exchange Mailbox Level Known Issues The following table lists the known issues for Exchange Mailbox Level:

Exchange Object Issue Public folder Public folder permission must be configured separately. Ensure you use the EditAll permission to avoid the following error message: Access is denied. Check credentials and try again. Public folder item’s property EWS does not support directly setting the date and time stamp. Email’s, Meeting, Appointment, Body and Note properties do not support RTF format, tables, Task, Contact fields WordArt, illustrations or images during restore to Exchange. Meeting’s properties EWS does not support the following Meeting properties: Accepted, Declined Email, Tentative, Declined, New Time Proposed email, Current or Proposed. Appointment’s deleted EWS does not support updates to the Deleted Occurrences field. occurrences Attachment’s size The limitation to attachments is 100 MB. Outlook display after a restore • The first line in an email body aligns to the left. • Email's Subject, Location and When properties display a format that is different from the original. Outlook Does not support Attachments in attachments. Contact’s business card Not supported for restore to file or PST.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 422 Exchange Mailbox Level Settings The following application settings are required for Exchange Mailbox Level.

Application Required Settings Exchange Create a Service Account with the following permissions: 2010/2013/2016 • Organization Management Role • Application Impersonation Role • Discovery Management Role (2013 & 2016 only)

Disable EWS Throttling for all users for performance. Exchange 2007 Create a Service Account with the following permissions: • Organization Administrator • Application Impersonation Role

Disable EWS Throttling for all users for performance. Enable PowerShell Remoting with the following settings: • Basic Authentication • Encrypted Only (https)

The following server settings are required for Exchange Mailbox Level.

Server Required Settings Windows Server 2008 Must have the following: • Windows PowerShell 2.0 • Agent machine must belong to the same domain as the Exchange Server

Creating Exchange Mailbox Level Backups To create an Exchange Mailbox Level backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 423 The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Exchange Mailbox Level.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 424 The credentials pop-up is displayed.

Note: Ensure you type the required credential permissions based on the Exchange version you are backing up. You can back up mailboxes from a single domain only. If you would like to back up data from a different domain using this subaccount, you must delete the backup data and the backup set before you can edit the URL. If you would like to back up from a second domain, create a new subaccount and install the Backup agent on a second system.

4. Type your credentials, and then click Confirm.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 425 The Select page is displayed.

5. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 6. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following radio button options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

7. At the Current Selection pane, select the mailboxes to be backed up.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more mailboxes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 426 Your selection is displayed in the right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections or clear the item check box.

8. Optionally select the Automatically back up newly created mailboxes check box at the bottom of the page, and then click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

9. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out.

10. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 427 The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

11. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 12. At the Folder Exclusions section, select the check boxes of folders to exclude, and then click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

Note: If the directory you have chosen does not have enough free space, the following pop up is displayed.

13. To change the directory, click the Change button. To continue with the backup, click Continue.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 428 14. At the Summary page, verify your backup selections, and then click Create Backup Set.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the latest backup set.

Editing Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Sets To edit an Exchange Mailbox Level backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 429 2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 430 The credentials pop-up is displayed.

4. Type your credentials, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

5. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Creating Exchange Mailbox Level Backups for details.

Notes:

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 431 • The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules. • The Storage Location Destination options on the Select page cannot be changed.

6. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the current backup status.

Removing Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Sets To remove an Exchange Mailbox Level backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Exchange Mailbox Level Backups for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 432 The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

Deleting Exchange Mailbox Level Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete an Exchange Mailbox Level backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 433 The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 434 The Delete page is displayed.

4. Select the radio button of the mailboxes to be deleted.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 435 The delete selections are displayed in the right panel.

5. After making your selections, click Delete.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Confirm your selections, and then click Yes.

The Deletes Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 436 Chapter 2. Restoring Exchange Mailbox Level Backups To restore an Exchange Mailbox Level backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Exchange Mailbox Level.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 437 The Select page is displayed

4. In the Current Selection pane, select the mailboxes to be restored.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more mailboxes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 438 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

Note: You can only restore from one Exchange Server at a time.

5. After confirming your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

6. Select a Restore Method radio button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 439 • If you select Restore to file(s) or Restore to .PST file, then at the Destination path field, type a path, or click the Browse button, and perform the following steps. See Browsing to a Folder. • If you select Restore Exchange, the following fields are displayed.

7. At the Existing Files section, select either Do not overwrite any existing files with restored files or Overwrite existing files with restored files radio button, 8. At the Deleted Items section, select Do not restore deleted items or Restore deleted items, and then click Next.

The Restore Summary page is displayed.

9. Verify the restore selections, and then click Restore.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

10. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 440 PART XIII. EXCHANGE INFORMATION STORE BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• Exchange Information Store Backup • Exchange Information Store Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. Exchange Information Store Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Creating Exchange Information Store Backups • Editing Exchange Information Store Backup Sets • Removing Exchange Information Store Backups • Deleting Exchange Information Store Backup Data

Creating Exchange Information Store Backups To create an Exchange Information Store backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 441 2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click Exchange Information Store.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 442 The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following radio button options.

Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

6. At the Current Selection pane, select the storage group to be backed up.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more storage groups.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 443 The storage group’s name and size are displayed at the far right.

7. Click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

8. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 444 Notes:

• Multiple weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out.

9. Select a backup method radio button, Incremental or Full.

Note: If you choose Full, every backup runs a full. If you choose Incremental, the first backup is a full and the subsequent backups are incremental.

10. After setting the schedule, click Next.

The Retention page is displayed.

11. Select the number of versions you wish to archive.

Note: The default retention is kept 4 weeks and no fewer than 4 versions.

12. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 445 The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

Example: The setting of a daily backup kept for 30 days and no fewer than 10 versions mean that 30 versions are kept. However, a setting of once a week means that after 10 weeks, 10 versions are kept.

13. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder located on a disk with enough space.

14. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder. 15. After making your selections, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 446 The Summary page is displayed.

16. At the Summary page, verify your backup selections, and then click Create Backup Set.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the latest backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 447 Editing Exchange Information Store Backup Sets To edit an Exchange Information Store backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 448 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 449 The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Creating Exchange Information Store Backups for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules. • The Storage Location Destination options on the Select page cannot be changed.

5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with the current backup status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 450 Removing Exchange Information Store Backup Sets To remove an Exchange Information Store backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating Exchange Information Store Backups for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 451 Deleting Exchange Information Store Backup Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete an Exchange Information Store backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 452 The Delete page is displayed.

4. Select the radio button of the items to be deleted.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more information store items

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 453 The delete selections are displayed in the right panel.

5. After making your selections, click Delete.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

6. Confirm your selection, and then click Yes.

The Deletes Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 454 Chapter 2. Restoring Exchange Information Store To restore an Exchange Information Store, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click Exchange Information Store.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 455 The Select page is displayed

4. Select from the available revisions and/or items to restore.

Clicking the arrow at the right of the items displays more revisions and items.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 456 The selection is displayed in the far-right pane. Click the remove icon to remove any selections.

Note: You can only restore from one Exchange Server at a time.

5. After confirming your selections, click Next.

The Destination page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 457 6. Select a Restore Option radio button.

• If you select Download to a temporary local folder, then at the Destination path field, type a path, or click the Browse button. See Browsing to a Folder. • If you select Restore over the current Information Store, the Path field is disabled. • If you select Restore to a Recovery Information Store, the Path field is disabled.

7. After your selections are complete, click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

8. Verify the restore selections, and then click Restore.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

9. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 458 PART XIV. SYSTEM STATE BACKUP AND RESTORE This section includes the following chapters:

• System State Backup • System State Restore

See Backup Agent Software Requirements for more information.

Chapter 1. System State Backup This chapter includes the following topics:

• Creating System State Backups • Editing System State Backup Sets • Removing System State Backups • Deleting System State Data

Creating System State Backups Note: Only one System State backup set may exist on a computer. To create a System State backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 459 2. Click the Backup tab.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

Note: The System State backup type is available only for agents of version 5.5.4 or above that have a supported operating system (Windows Server) and the Windows Server Backup feature enabled.

3. In the Backup Type pane, click System State.

The Select page is displayed.

4. Click the Backup Name to provide a new name for the backup set or accept the default. See Changing Backup Set Names. 5. At the Select Storage Location section, click one of the following radio button options.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 460 Note: This procedure applies to all options. See Backup Options for more information.

• Local Only (Local Vault must be enabled, and a local subscription is required. Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online Only (An enabled Local Vault disables this option.) • Online and Local (Local Vault must be enabled.)

6. Click Next.

The Schedule page is displayed.

7. Accept or edit the default schedule. See Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule for more information.

Notes:

• Multiple daily/weekly schedules are permitted (if they do not overlap). • The Allow to Finish check box is always selected and grayed-out. • The default is every week on Sunday at 11:00 p.m. The backup is allowed to finish before starting the next schedule occurrence.

8. After setting the schedule, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 461 The Retention page is displayed.

9. Select the number of versions you wish to archive.

Note: The default retention is kept 4 weeks and no fewer than 4 versions.

10. Optionally, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box. For Advanced Archiving information, see Archiving Rules.

The Advanced Archiving fields are displayed.

11. Make your selections, click Save Rule, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 462 The Advanced page is displayed.

Requirement: You must specify a temporary folder and a scratch drive located on a disk with enough space.

12. At the Temporary Folder field, accept the default, type a new path, type a new path, or click the Browse button to locate the temporary folder that is used in backing up. See Browsing to a Folder.

Note: To back up Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard and Windows Server 2008 and above, you must have a non-critical drive with enough free space to host the system state backup.

13. At the Scratch Drive section, click the down-arrow to display non-critical drives, select a non- critical drive with enough free space to host the system state backup, and then click Next.

The Summary page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 463 14. At the Summary page, verify your backup selections, and then click Create Backup Set.

If you did not change the default backup set name, a confirmation pop-up is displayed after clicking the Create Backup Set button, as shown in the example below.

This feature allows you to create a unique name for the backup set. If you already changed the default backup set name, the pop-up is not displayed.

Optionally, change the backup set name, press Enter, and then click Confirm.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with current backup status.

Editing System State Backup Sets To edit a System State backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Backup tab.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 464 The Backup Selections page is displayed.

3. Click the edit icon beside the backup set you want to edit.

The Backup Set Summary page is displayed.

4. Select any of the tabs to display and edit the current settings. See Creating System State Backups for details.

Notes:

• The backup set name may be edited. See Changing Backup Set Names. • To edit existing schedules, see Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules. • The Storage Location Destination options on the Select page cannot be changed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 465 5. After making your edits, click the Update Backup Set button at the bottom of any page, as shown below.

The Backup Selections page is displayed with current backup status.

Removing System State Backup Sets To remove a System State backup set, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Backup Selections page. See Creating System State Backups for instructions.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

2. At the relevant backup set row, click the remove icon to remove the backup set.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

3. Click Yes.

The backup set is removed.

The System State backup type is enabled with the Add button displayed so you can create a new System State backup set.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 466 Deleting System State Data CAUTION! Deleted data is completely purged and can no longer be accessed or restored. To delete a System State backup, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Select the Delete tab.

The Delete Selections page is displayed.

3. Select the backup type you want to delete.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 467 The Delete page is displayed.

4. Select the check boxes of the items to be deleted, and then click Delete.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

5. Confirm your selections, and then click Yes.

The Deletes Selections page is displayed with the latest status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 468 Chapter 2. Restoring System State To restore a System State, perform the following steps. 1. Navigate to the Computer page. See Navigating to the Computer Page for instructions.

The Computer page is displayed.

2. Click the Restore tab.

The Restore Selections page is displayed.

3. Click System State.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 469 The Select page is displayed

Note: You can only restore from one System State at a time.

4. In the Current Selection pane, select from the available revisions to restore, and then click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 470 The Destination page is displayed.

5. At the Path field, type a path, or click the Browse button to select the destination of the restore. See Browsing to a Folder. 6. After your selection is complete, click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 471 The Summary page is displayed.

7. Verify the restore selections, and then click Restore.

The confirmation pop-up is displayed.

8. Click Yes.

The Restore Selections page is displayed with the status.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 472 PART XV. PARTNER PRICING This section provides the following chapters:

• Minimum Commitment Based Levels • Volume Pricing • Package Pricing • Annual Prepay Plan

Chapter 1. Minimum Commitment Levels This chapter includes the following topics:

• Minimum Commitment Based on Amount instead of Number/Types of Packages • Commitment Shortfall Status

Minimum Commitment Based on Amount instead of Number/Types of Packages To add increased flexibility for newer partners, you can have your minimum commitment levels based on a currency amount instead of how many packages you are currently using. This option allows you to assign accounts independently without reaching out to Barracuda Networks, Inc. You also can attain commitment numbers without assigning packages to accounts that might not be the best fit for those accounts. To change your commitment type, from number of packages to a currency amount, contact Barracuda sales. Important! You can select either package pricing plan or the volume pricing per GB plan – but not both. If you select the package-pricing plan, all your accounts must be assigned a package. If you select the volume pricing per GB plan, there are no changes in the portal.

Commitment Shortfall Status You can view your commitment shortfall status on your invoice, or on the following portal pages:

• Manage Account/Packages page • Estimated Billing page

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 473 Viewing Shortfall Status from the Manage Account/Packages Page To view commitment shortfall from the Manage Account/Packages page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the Manage Account/Packages link, as shown below.

The Manage Account/Packages page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 474 2. Click the Additional Costs information icon.

The Additional Costs pop up displays any minimum commitment shortfall line.

Viewing Estimated Billing and Invoice Shortfall Status To view commitment shortfall from the Estimated Billing page and the Invoice, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Pay Bill, and then View/Estimate Bill, as shown below.

The Billing page is displayed.

2. Click the Estimate Bill button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 475 The estimated bill is displayed with the commitment shortfall, as shown in the following example.

3. To view the invoice, click the Invoice Number link, as shown below.

The invoice details with the commitment shortfall line item are displayed. Any shortfall amount is displayed in the Amount column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 476 Chapter 2. Volume Pricing This chapter includes the following topics:

• About Volume Pricing • Storage Management

About Volume Pricing Barracuda charges partners by space used for storage plus any overages (exceeding your plans’ space allocation), as well as any licenses for backup types. Because space usage is a cost, managing your storage is necessary. The following section describes storage management options.

Storage Management You can manage storage of data by:

• Creating archiving rules. See Archiving Rules for more information. • Deleting files. Refer to the various Delete procedures in this guide. • Deleting stray files. See Stray Files for more information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 477

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 478 Chapter 3. Package Pricing This chapter includes the following topics:

• U2 Plan • Package Pricing Support for Partners • Package Pricing Model • Adding a Partner • The Manage Accounts/Packages Link • Manage Packages/Accounts Page • Custom Package Billing Plans • Assigning Packages • Migrating Existing Accounts to Package Pricing from Volume Pricing • Package Invoice Description • Account Snapshot Report

U2 Plan The U2 Plan offers unlimited local storage to our partners for a flat monthly rate per small or midsize business (SMB) site. This package pricing option lets you pay the exact same cost for each business location you protect, and your cost remains the same even if your SMBs’ local storage needs grow over time.

Package Pricing Model With the Package Pricing model, Partners can do the following:

• Switch to package pricing • Assign packages to subpartner accounts as well as to direct accounts

Custom packages are created and assigned to the subpartner based on the basic packages that a master partner has available to sell. Only one custom package is available to a single account. After a subpartner creates an account, a list of available custom packages is provided from which to choose. The subpartner can then sell the custom packages to their accounts.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 479 Figure 40 illustrates an example of package pricing support for partners.

Figure 40. Package Pricing Support for Partners.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 480 Adding a Partner To add a partner, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Manage, and then click the Add Partner button.

The Partner: New Partner page is displayed.

2. Complete the fields, and then click Save.

The new partner is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 481

New accounts and packages now can be assigned to the new partner. See Assigning Packages to New Accounts.

Manage Accounts/Packages Link The Manage Accounts/Packages link on the Management Dashboard allows you to display the page where you can select and assign packages to your subpartners.

The Backup packages column displays the accounts for which you have assigned packages.

Figure 41 provides a view of the Manage Accounts/Packages link on the Management Dashboard.

Figure 41. The Manage Accounts/Packages Link.

Figure 42 shows the information that is displayed when you hover over or click the Backup Packages entry in the column.

Figure 42. Backup Package Information.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 482 The Manage Accounts/Packages Page This section includes the following topics:

• Manage Accounts/Packages Page Description • Viewing Account Billing Plan Details • Viewing Extra Costs Information • Exporting Accounts/Packages to a .CSV File

Manage Accounts/Packages Page Description The Manage Accounts/Packages page (Figure 43) displays the MSP’s accounts. You can select the Backup Package to assign, and the Account Plan to be used. In addition, you can:

• Create custom packages. See Creating a Custom Package Billing Plan. • Assign packages to subpartners. See Assigning Packages.

Note: This option is only for partners using package pricing, not volume pricing.

Figure 43. The Manage Accounts/Packages Page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 483 Viewing Account Billing Plan Details To view account billing plans details, perform the following steps.

1. Click the Choose Account Billing Plan information icon.

The Account Billing Plan page is displayed.

2. When done viewing plan details, click the Close button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 484 Viewing Extra Costs Information To view the extra costs information associated with the account, click the link in the Extra Cost row, as shown below.

Exporting Accounts/Packages to a .CSV File To view the extra costs information associated with the account, click the Export Accounts/Packages button. The data contained in the Accounts/Packages dialog is exported to a .CSV file. You can open the .CSV file, in Excel for example, and perform an analysis or print it. See Figure 44 for an example of the .CSV file.

Figure 44. Example of .CSV File.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 485 Custom Packages Billing Plans This section includes the following topics:

• Creating a Custom Package Billing Plan • Editing a Subpartner Custom Package Billing Plan • Deactivating a Custom Package Billing Plan

Creating a Custom Package Billing Plan To create a custom package, perform the following steps. 1. At the Manage Accounts/Packages page, select Create Custom Packages.

The Billing Plan Administration page is displayed.

2. Click the Add Package Plan button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 486 The New Billing Plan form is displayed.

3. Select the Package drop-down arrow and select a linked parent package from the menu.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 487 The form fields are populated with the custom plan entries based on the parent package.

4. Click the Create Plan button.

The new plan is listed on the Billing Plan Administration page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 488 Editing a Subpartner Custom Package Billing Plan To edit a subpartner custom package billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, select Manage, and then select the subpartner you want to edit.

The Manage Partner page is displayed.

2. Click the Edit button at the upper right.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 489 The Partner Information form is displayed.

Note: All custom packages the parent partner has created are displayed with an estimated bill, as highlighted. In addition, the unpurchased plans are displayed (shown as zero under the Accounts column).

3. Make your edits, and then click the Save button.

The Partner Information page is re-displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 490 Deactivating a Custom Package Billing Plan To deactivate a Custom Package billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences, Configure Billing Plans.

The Billing Plan Administration page is displayed.

2. Click the link of the plan you want to deactivate.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 491 The Edit Billing Plan form is displayed. Note: An inactive custom package plan is no longer available for new account assignment. However, for subpartners already assigned to the custom package, there is no impact.

3. At the Status is Active check box, click to clear the check box, and then click the Update Plan button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 492 The Active column displays No on the Billing Plan Administration page.

Assigning Packages This section includes the following topics:

• Assignment Process • Assigning Packages to Subpartner Accounts • Assigning Packages to New Accounts • Assigning Packages to Existing Accounts • Migrating Existing Accounts to Package Pricing from Volume Pricing

Assignment Process Partners assign packages to subpartner accounts using the following process.

Stage What Happens 1 After a master partner purchases package-pricing plans from Barracuda, the subpartners can be added to their listings. 2 The master partner creates custom packages for the subpartner accounts. 3 The master partner creates subpartner accounts and assigns the custom packages. 4 The master partner can edit, delete, or restore options to assigned packages.

Assigning Packages to Subpartner Accounts To assign packages to a subpartner account, perform the following steps. 1. Log in to the Barracuda MSP portal, and then select Manage.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 493 The Management Dashboard is displayed.

2. Select the Manage Accounts/Packages link.

The Manage Accounts/Packages page is displayed.

3. Select Assign Packages to Subpartners.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 494 The Manage Subpartners/Packages page is displayed.

4. Click the Packages drop-down arrow.

The available custom packages are displayed.

5. Select the package to be assigned, and then select the subpartner account check box.

The Assign button is activated.

6. Click the Assign button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 495 The package is assigned.

Assigning Packages to New Accounts To assign packages to new accounts, perform the following steps. 1. Log in to the Barracuda MSP portal, and then select Manage.

The Management Dashboard is displayed.

2. Click the Add Account button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 496 The New Account form is displayed.

3. Complete the form, and then click Save.

The new Account is displayed.

Assigning Packages to Existing Accounts To assign packages to an existing account, perform the following steps. 1. Log in to the Barracuda MSP portal, and then click Manage on the ECHOplatform ribbon.

The Management Dashboard is displayed.

2. Click the account you want modify.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 497 The Manage Account page is displayed.

3. Click the Edit button.

The account data is displayed.

4. Use the Backup package and/or Account billing plan drop-down menus to make your modifications, and then click Save.

The Account page is displayed with your modifications.

Migrating Existing Accounts to Package Pricing from Volume Pricing This section includes the following topics:

• Migration Overview

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 498 • Migrating an Existing Account to Package Pricing

This section provides an overview and procedure on migrating existing accounts to Package Pricing from Volume Pricing.

Migration Overview When you log in to the portal, if the migration to the Package Plan from the Volume Plan has not been completed (there are still accounts not assigned to Package Plan), the Management Dashboard and the Accounts/Packages dialog automatically displays. To complete your conversion from a Volume Plan, you need to assign all your accounts to a Package Pricing plan. Until you complete this conversion for all your accounts, you remain on your current volume plan. The Manage Accounts/Packages dialog provides the status of how many accounts you have currently converted.

Migrating an Existing Account to Package Pricing To migrate an existing account to Package Pricing, perform the following steps. 1. Log in to the Barracuda MSP portal, and then click Manage on the ECHOplatform ribbon.

The Management Dashboard is displayed.

2. At the Management Dashboard, select the Manage Accounts/Packages link.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 499 The Manage Accounts/Packages page is displayed.

3. Select the account check box you want to modify, choose a Backup Package and/or Account Billing Plan from the drop-down menus, and then click Assign.

Note: You many select any number of accounts.

The account is updated.

Package Invoice Description Barracuda bills the master partner for the packages assigned directly to their accounts, and the packages on which their subpartners’ custom packages are based.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 500 Figure 45 provides an example of the package billing for a partner’s invoice that includes subpartners.

Figure 45. Package Billing for Partners Invoice that Includes Subpartners. Account Snapshot Report The account snapshot report displays the backup package (BUP) usage for the account, as shown in Figure 46. The BUP usage is based on the custom packages.

Figure 46. Account Snapshot Report.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 501

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 502 Chapter 4. Annual Prepay Plan This chapter includes the following topics:

• About the Annual Prepay Plan • Cost and Discount Information • Annual Prepay Plan Invoice Information

About the Annual Prepay Plan With the annual prepay plan, package partners can benefit from discounts depending on yearly usage. Example: A partner purchases one annual package with 10 commitments for a list price of $500 and a 25% discount. On the first month of billing, the charge is 10 commitments x $500 list price x 12 months for a total of $60,000, By applying the prepaid discount of 25% or $15,000, the net is $45,000. On the second month since the commitment is prepaid, if there are no extra site licenses or other usages, then there is no charge. However, if there are extra site licenses or other usages, then the monthly price is applied. Billing for the annual prepay plan may occur during the following frequencies:

• Quarterly • Annually • Biannually • Biennially

Cost and Discount Information The Manage Accounts/Packages page provides two-line items to display the annual prepay plan information:

• Additional Costs line • Additional Discounts line

Additional Costs Line The Additional Costs line (see Figure 47) displays the additional prepaid charges the partner has incurred for the extra 11-month payment for all commitments, such as coupons and prepaid costs.

Displaying Additional Costs for an Account To display additional costs information for an Account, at the bottom of the Manage Accounts/Packages page, click the information icon at the Additional Costs line.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 503 The annual prepay plan information is provided on the Additional Prepaid line, as shown in Figure 47.

Figure 47. Additional Costs Information.

Additional Discounts Line Since all commitments have a prepaid discount, the Additional Discounts line (see Figure 48) displays prepaid discounts.

Displaying Additional Discounts for an Account To display additional discounts information, at the bottom of the Manage Accounts/Packages page, click the information icon at the Additional Discounts line. If the billing is not on a renewal cycle, only charges for the extra site licenses for each package are applied. Since each account’s monthly payment is still provided, the Prepaid Amount displays the subtracted amount for the annual payment.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 504 The annual prepay plan information is provided on the Prepaid Discounts and Prepaid Amount lines, as shown in Figure 48.

Figure 48. Additional Discounts Information. Annual Prepay Plan Invoice Information If a partner is assigned a non-monthly frequency, and there is a discount for the commitment, then a prepaid discount coupon is assigned. On the first invoice, the pre-charge includes all commitments for the pay period (if annual, then 12 months) based on the partner package price, minus the prepaid discount.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 505 The Prepaid Discount line item highlighted in Figure 49 displays the discount on the invoice.

Figure 49. Prepaid Discount Invoice Line Item

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 506 On the non-renewal date invoice, only the charges for the extra site licenses and other usage fees are displayed, as show in Figure 50.

Figure 50. Non-renewal Invoice.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 507

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 508 PART XVI. BILLING This part provides the following chapters:

• Account Billing • DPaaS Billing

Chapter 1. Account Billing This chapter includes the following topics:

• Creating an Account Billing Plan • Assigning a Plan to a Partner • Changing an Account Billing Plan • Editing an Account Billing Plan • Deleting an Account Billing Plan • Viewing Current Monthly Account Billing Information • Viewing Account Billing Plan Information • Package Invoice Description • Account Snapshot Report

Creating an Account Billing Plan To create an account-billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences, Configure Billing Plans.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 509 The Account Billing Plan Administration page is displayed.

2. Click the Add Account Plan tab.

The New Billing Plan form is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 510 Note: The following table provides information about the Unlimited check box options.

When you click the Then, Unlimited check box beside the following field… Base Plan Size • the field becomes inactive and the word Unlimited displays indicating the Account Billing Plan does not impose a limitation on the amount of storage used by the accounts assigned to this billing plan. • the Extra GB Block Size field becomes inactive and N.A. (not applicable) displays. Accounts assigned to this Billing Plan have no limitations on extra blocks. • the Extra Block Price field becomes inactive and N.A. (not applicable) displays. Because there is no limitation on extra blocks, price is not tracked. Included Computers • the field becomes inactive and displays Unlimited indicating there is no limit to computers an account can protect. • the Extra Computer Price field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) indicating that because you can protect an unlimited number of computers, there is no need to specify an extra computer price. • the GB Included with Extra Computer field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) indicating that because you can protect an unlimited number of computers, there is no need to specify an amount for allowed GBs. QuickSpin VM Host License the field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) Price indicating that the account assigned to this billing plan can protect an unlimited amount of QuickSpin VM Hosts without incurring an extra charge. Imaging License Price the field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) indicating that the account assigned to this billing plan can protect an unlimited amount of Imaging without incurring an extra charge. Local Backup Subscription the field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) Price indicating that the account assigned to this billing plan can back up an unlimited number of computers locally without incurring an extra charge. Hyper-V Host License Price the field becomes inactive and displays N.A. (not applicable) indicating that the account assigned to this billing plan can protect an unlimited amount of Hyper-V Hosts without incurring an extra charge.

Note: Asterisks indicate a mandatory field.

3. Complete the fields, and then click the Create Plan button. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 511 Assigning a Plan to a Partner To assign a plan to a partner, perform the following steps. 1. Log into the Intronis portal, and then click Manage on the ECHOplatform ribbon.

The Management Dashboard is displayed.

2. At the Management Dashboard, select the Manage Accounts/Packages link.

The Manage Accounts/Packages page is displayed.

3. Select the account check box you want to modify, at the Choose an Account Billing Plan drop-down menu, select a plan, and then click the Assign button.

Note: You many select any number of accounts. The account is updated.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 512 Changing an Account Billing Plan To change an account-billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the account that you want to change.

The Account page is displayed.

2. Click the Billing tab.

The Billing data is displayed.

3. Select the radio button of the new plan you want.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 513 The following prompt is displayed.

4. Click the Yes button.

The plan is updated.

Editing an Account Billing Plan To edit an account-billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences, Configure Billing Plans.

The Account Billing Plan Administration page is displayed.

2. Click the plan you want to edit.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 514 The Edit Billing Plan form is displayed.

3. Make your edits, and then click the Update Plan button.

The new edits are displayed on the Billing Plan Administration page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 515 Deleting an Account Billing Plan To delete an account-billing plan, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Preferences, Configure Billing Plans.

The Billing Plan Administration page is displayed.

2. Select the row of the plan you want to delete.

The Delete Plan button is enabled.

3. Click the Delete Plan button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 516 If you have active accounts currently associated with the plan to be deleted, you are prompted to move these plans to another active plan, as shown below.

4. Click the drop-down arrow to in the switch field to select an account to switch the displayed accounts to, and then click Next.

The Delete Plan confirmation is displayed.

5. Click the Delete button.

The plan is removed from the Billing Plan Administration page.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 517 Viewing Current Monthly Account Billing Information To view current monthly account billing information, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the account you want to view.

The Manage Account page is displayed.

2. Click the Billing tab.

The Billing information is displayed.

3. Click the Current Monthly Account Billing Plan information icon.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 518 The current monthly plan information is displayed.

Viewing Account Billing Plan Information To display the Manage Account page price information, at the Manage Account page, click the Account billing plan information icon. The Account billing plan price information is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 519 Package Invoice Description Figure 51 provides an example of information displayed on the package invoice.

Figure 51. Package Invoice.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 520 Account Snapshot Report Figure 52 and Figure 53 provides information about the Account Snapshot Report columns and a description of the headers.

Figure 52. Account Snapshot Report.

Figure 53. Snapshot Report (continued).

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 521

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 522 Chapter 2. DPaaS Billing This chapter includes the following topics:

• DPaaS Account Commitment • Viewing DPaaS Commitment Status from the Manage Accounts/Packages Page • Viewing Estimated Billing and Invoice DPaaS Commitment Status

DPaaS Account Commitment Data Protection as a Service (DPaaS) requires a minimum account commitment.

IF you have… THEN you are billed… more than the minimum number of accounts for the minimum account commitment plus a flat using DPaaS, fee for each account over the minimum. the exact number as the minimum commitment, for the minimum account commitment. fewer accounts than the minimum commitment,

There are three ways to view DPaaS commitment status. You can view status from the:

• Manage Accounts/Packages page • View/Estimate Bill page • Invoice

Viewing DPaaS Commitment Status from the Manage Accounts/Packages Page To view DPaaS commitment status from the Manage Accounts/Packages page, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the Manage Accounts/Packages link, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 523 The Manage Accounts/Packages page is displayed.

2. Click the Additional Costs information icon.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 524 The Additional Costs pop up displays an example DPaaS minimum commitment line item. Any commitment costs would be displayed on this line item.

Viewing Estimated Billing and Invoice DPaaS Commitment Status To view DPaaS commitment status from the View/Estimate Bill page and from the Invoice, perform the following steps. 1. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Pay Bill, View/Estimate Bill.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 525 The Billing page is displayed.

2. Click the Estimate Bill button.

The estimated bill is displayed, as shown in the following example.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 526 3. To view the invoice, click the Invoice Number link, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 527 On the invoice, line items for the number of accounts using DPaaS are displayed. Any minimum commitment cost, if applied, is displayed in the Amount column.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 528 PART XVII. CONTACTING PARTNER SUPPORT This chapter includes the following topics:

• How and When to Contact Partner Support • Common Issues You Can Check • Preparing for Support

How and When to Contact Partner Support Partner Support hours are Monday – Friday 8 am – 9 pm EST. Contact Partner Support by:

• Phone at 1-800-569-0155, option 1. • Live chat from the website or management portal. • Emailing [email protected].

During weekends and holidays, coverage during business hours is provided via email only. Before contacting the Partner Support Team, attempt level-one troubleshooting of the issue.

Common Issues You Can Check Here are some common issues you can check before seeking support.

• Access the logs for flagged issues through the management portal or on the local software. • When a failed backup notice is received, try to reproduce the issue or manually run a backup. • Check the network and environmental variables that could cause a backup to fail.

 Check for corresponding errors  VSS writers  Permissions  Connection/Firewall/Anti-virus

• Check the Knowledge Base for relevant articles.

Preparing for Support When you contact the Partner Support Team, be ready to provide the following:

• The user name of the account with the issue and the computer ID. • Any warnings, exceptions, or error messages.

If an existing case, have that case number available so Support can access it to find all relevant information. Depending on the backup solution, a remote connection to the machine may be necessary.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 529

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 530 PART XVIII. APPENDIX This appendix includes the following topics:

• Navigating to the Computer Page • Searching for an Account • Browsing to a Folder • Adding a Network Location • Changing Backup Set Names • Changing Cloud Backup to Local Only Backup • Backup Options • Archiving Rules • Schedule Page Interval Start and End Time Options • VMware Clusters • About the Backup Monitor • About Groups

Navigating to the Computer Page To navigate to the Computer page, perform the following steps. 1. Log in to your account.

The Home page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 531 2. At the ECHOplatform ribbon, click Manage.

The Management Dashboard is displayed.

3. Click the Account/Computer you want to access.

The Manage Account page is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 532 4. Select a computer from the Computer list.

The Computer page is displayed.

5. Follow the procedures in this guide to perform backups, restores, and deletes.

Searching for an Account Use the account navigation aid located at the upper right corner of any page to find and navigate to an account, as shown in Figure 54 below.

Figure 54. Account Navigation Aid.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 533 By typing the company name or username, any matches from the Company Name and Username fields are displayed. For example, if you type the letter B, all the accounts whose company name and/or username that begin with the letter B are displayed, as shown in Figure 55.

Figure 55. Search Results.

Note: If there is a match for the Username (but not Company name), the new item is sorted by company name, not user name. For example, Figure 55 displays the company, Acton Candlepins with its username of bowlacton. When you select the displayed name, you navigate to one of the following pages:

• Account • Subpartner • Subpartner account

Refining Your Search By refining your search, you can display more results. For example, a search returns the top 25 results, even if 100 results qualify. By refining your search, you can display the other 75.

Cancelling a Search To cancel a search, click the X key on the keyboard. The prompt text is redisplayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 534 Browsing to a Folder To browse to a folder, perform the following steps. 1. Click the Browse button.

The folder options are displayed.

2. Select the destination.

The OK button is activated.

3. Click OK.

The address is displayed in the Path field.

Adding a Network Location To add a network location, perform the following steps. 1. Type the network path address in the Path field as shown in the example below.

The add button is activated.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 535 2. Click the add button.

Changing Backup Set Names To change the name of a backup set, perform the following steps.

1. At the backup set name on any page, click the edit icon .

The placement of the icon is indicated in the example below.

The name field is activated, and the edit icons are displayed.

2. Select and delete to erase the current name.

The name is erased.

Note: To cancel the name change and restore the current name, click the red icon.

3. Type the new name of the backup set in the field, and then click the green icon.

The new backup set name is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 536 Changing Cloud Backup to Local Only Backup Prerequisite: Ensure the Local Vault is created, and a Local Only Backup option has been purchased and enabled. To change a backup that was originally configured to be online to Local Only, perform the following steps. 1. Contact Barracuda technical support to remove the data from the Cloud. 2. Delete the Backup Set. 3. Recreate and configure the Backup Set as local only.

Canceling Options On any page, you can select the cancelation options highlighted in Figure 56.

Figure 56. Cancelation Options.

Selecting either option causes the following pop-up to display.

Selecting Yes causes all changes to be lost. Selecting No allows you to resume your actions.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 537 Backup Options During the backup procedure, you can select one of the following backup options:

• Online only • Local only (Data is not backed up to the cloud.) • Online and local

Note: Online and Local is shown only if the Local Vault is set up for this computer. The Local Only option is available if the Local Vault is set up and the computer has a Local Backup subscription assigned.

Online Only Data is remotely stored on the cloud. An active Local Vault disables this option.

Local Only Local only backup works in conjunction with an existing feature called the Local Vault. The Local Vault is where local copies and local-only data are saved. These backups are not stored on support servers and do not count toward your remote storage. Local Only also requires a local backup subscription. Without a local backup subscription, the local only option is unavailable. Local Only backup sets are stored only on:

• The original machine • A NAS device • Another local location • A network share

For Local Only backups, the local backup subscription and the Local Vault must be enabled.

Local-Only backups are ideal for data that needs to be backed up but that may not be the best candidate for online backup. Some reasons to use Local-Only backups are for:

• Media files that do not change and do not need daily revisions, such as .mp3s, .movs, .jpgs. • Non- critical personal data. • Data that the client does not want to pay for but still wants backed up (music and/or video libraries). • Exchange Mailbox backups – the messages are available locally if a client is missing an e-mail (the recommendation is to back up the Exchange Info Store servers online for Disaster Recovery).

Changing the Local Vault after a local backup is run means losing the backed-up data if the data is:

• not manually moved to a new location. • not stored in the cloud, (online and local backup set).

Online and Local Online and Local backup sets are stored locally and online. The Local Vault must be enabled.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 538 Archiving Rules This section includes the following topics:

• Setting Archiving Rules • Advanced Archiving Retention Parameters • Daily, Weekly, Monthly and Yearly Calculations • How Archiving Rules Work for Files and Folders • Advanced Archiving Rules Templates • Setting the Advanced Archiving Rules for Files and Folders

Setting Archiving Rules Archiving rules are specific to each type of backup set and must be configured while creating or editing the backup set. You can set the number of days that the backup sets are kept and set the number of versions that are kept. Archiving rules dictate how many versions of each file are kept. The maximum number of versions that can be kept is 99. The maximum length of time a version can be kept is Forever. The more versions you keep, the higher the storage usage. If changed, the Archiving Rule applies to the data you back up when the next backup runs. Previous backup sets are not affected.

How Archiving Rules Work Note: Archiving rules for Files and Folders is used as an example for this section.

The archiving rules for Files and Folders can be selectively applied to files and folders as shown in Figure 57. The This rule applies to field accepts wildcard filters using commas.

The default is to keep no fewer than 10 versions for at least 30 days.

Figure 57. Advanced Archiving Rules Settings.

You also have the option of applying template options as described in the following sections:

• Add a New Archiving Rule • Start from a Template

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 539 Add a New Archiving Rule Select Add a New Archiving Rule to display the following menu.

The options available allow you to create a template based on the following parameters:

• Age • Versions • Disk Usage • Date Range

Start from a Template Select Start From a Template to display the following menu.

The options available allow you to create a template based on the following parameters:

• Medical • Accounting • Keep More • Keep Less

Advanced Archiving Retention Parameters Advanced archiving rules can be set based on the following parameters:

• Days • Weeks • Months • Years • Forever

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 540 Daily A daily revision is the latest revision from a calendar day, or the closest to 23:59:59 time of day.

Weekly A weekly revision can be set on any day of the week. The default value for weekly revisions is Sunday to follow the ISO date standard. If no revision exists on Sunday, a search for the closest day from Saturday is performed.

Monthly A monthly revision is determined by the latest from a month (or closest to it). During monthly intervals the last Sunday from a month back up is kept, instead of the last day.

Yearly The latest revision for that year is kept, or the closest to it. The revision day always starts on a Sunday.

Advanced Archiving Rules Templates To display the template menu, perform the following steps. 1. At the Retention page, select the Enable Advanced Archiving check box, and then select the Start from a Template drop-down arrow.

2. Select the template to create an archiving rule.

The values of the templates are listed below: Medical • Line 1: Keep all versions from now until 1 (days, weeks, months, years, forever). • Line 2: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 3: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 4: After (x), keep nothing. • Keep no less than: (1 to 99) versions. • Applies to: All

Note: For Files and Folders, you can selectively apply the rules to files and folders using the This rule applies to field.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 541 Accounting • Line 1: Keep all versions from now to 1 (days, weeks, months, years, forever). • Line 2: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 3: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 4: After(x), keep nothing. • Keep no less than: (1 to 99) versions. • Applies to: All

Note: For Files and Folders, you can selectively apply the rules to files and folders using the Apply field. Keep More • Line 1: Keep all versions from now until 1 (days, weeks, months, years, forever). • Line 2: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 3: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 4: After(x), keep nothing. • Keep no less than: (1 to 99) versions. • Applies to: All

Keep Less • Line 1: Keep all versions from now until 1 (days, weeks, months, years, forever). • Line 2: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 3: After 1 (x), keep (x) versions for (x). • Line 4: After(x), keep nothing. • Keep no less than: (1 to 99) versions. • Applies to: All

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 542 Setting Advanced Archiving Rules for Files and Folders To set advanced archiving rules, perform the following steps. 1. At the Retention page, click the Enable Advanced Archiving check box.

The advanced archiving options are displayed.

2. To change the times and version fields, click the arrows to a setting, and then click Save Rule. 3. To add a new archiving rule, click the Add a New Archiving Rule down arrow.

The rules menu is displayed.

4. Select a menu option.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 543 The following table provides the displays for each option.

If you Then the following is displayed… select… Age

Version

Disk Usage

Date Range

5. If you selected Date Range, then click the Add button to display additional rule fields that can be applied, as shown below.

6. To add another rule to this selection, click the icon.

Another rule field is displayed with an incremental time span (years), as shown below.

7. Make your selections, and then click the Save Rule button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 544 Your selection is summarized in the Advanced Archiving row, as show in the following example.

8. Click the remove icon to remove any unwanted selections. 9. When satisfied with your selections, click Update Backup Set.

The Backup Selections page is displayed.

Backup Schedules The schedule page allows the scanning for, and backing up of, new, and modified files at the following specific time intervals:

• By the minute • Hourly • Daily • Weekly

The Schedule page displays start and end time options for interval-based backups for the following backup types:

- Files and Folders

- Physical Imaging

- Hyper-V Rapid Recovery

- VMware QuickSpin

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 545 By the Minute and Hourly Recurrences You cannot select a by the minute or an hourly recurrence with a daily or weekly schedule. Only one by the minute or hourly recurrence can be scheduled. You can select a recurrence pattern by minutes for the following intervals:

• 15 • 30 • 45 • 60 • 90 • 120

For a by the minute recurrence pattern, you may select any number of minutes. The default setting is 60 minutes, as shown below.

This option sets a backup to run every 60 minutes. The backup is allowed to finish before starting the next schedule occurrence.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 546 For an hourly recurrence pattern, you can select from 1 to 999 hours. The default setting is 1 hour, as shown below.

This option sets a backup to run every 1 hour. The backup is allowed to finish before starting the next schedule occurrence.

Daily and Weekly You can set multiple daily and weekly schedules. You cannot select a daily or weekly recurrence with a by the minute or an hourly schedule.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 547 The default setting for a daily recurrence is every day, as shown below.

The default start time is 11:00 PM. To sets backups to run every day of the week other than Saturday and Sunday, select the Every Weekday check box.

To set backups to run every day, clear the Every Weekday check box. The default setting for a weekly recurrence is every week on every day, as shown below.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 548 Start and End times

Select the clock icon to set Start and End times. To display the End time option, clear the Allow to Finish check box. Setting an End time cancels a running backup at the set time even if the backup set is not completely backed up. You must schedule an End time that ends before the scheduled Start time. Select the Allow To Finish checkbox to allow active backups to complete before starting the next scheduled backup. Allow To Finish runs the backup until completion regardless of End time.

Adding a New Daily or Weekly Schedule To add additional daily or weekly schedules, perform the following steps. 1. At the Schedule page, click the Add New button.

The new Schedule is displayed, and the Add New button is highlighted, as shown below.

2. Make your selections.

The new schedule details are displayed.

Editing Existing Daily or Weekly Schedules To edit additional daily or weekly schedules, perform the following steps. 1. In the Schedule column, click the schedule details.

The Schedule is highlighted.

2. Edit daily or weekly times.

The schedule is displayed in the Schedule column. Click the remove icon to delete schedule.

VMware Clusters Clusters are a group of hosts linked to be managed as a group. A cluster can act as a single, larger, more powerful host by sharing the resources of all hosts.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 549 Some benefits of host clusters include:

• High Availability • Sharing of Resources • vMotion

High Availability If a host in the cluster goes down, the VMs that resided on that host can be started up on one of the other hosts in the cluster.

Sharing of Resources VMs can be load balanced across hosts to utilize efficiently the resources (CPU, Memory, etc.) of the cluster with VMware Distributed Resource Scheduler (DRS).

vMotion Clustering hosts allows the use of vMotion, which is the live migration of VMs across hosts in the cluster without having to power them down.

About the Backup Monitor The Backup Monitor can be used to perform the following:

• Routine Tasks • Re-installation Tasks

Routine Tasks The Backup Monitor can be used to perform the following routine tasks:

• Run a Hyper-V, VMware, and Image backup • Delete a Hyper-V, VMware, and Image backup • View logs related to image and VMware actions • View image and VMware backups in the Account Summary and Backup Sets screens

You cannot create or edit Hyper-V, VMware, or Image backups using the Backup Monitor. You can create these backups using the management portal at https://manage.barracudamsp.com.

Re-installation Tasks The Backup Monitor can be used to perform the following re-installation tasks:

• Recover Previous Installation • Move Account to this Computer • Recovery Mode Installation

Recover Previous Installation Select Recover Previous Installation if you are re-installing the software on the computer on which the software was originally installed. This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 550 Move Account to this Computer Select Move Account to this Computer if you are installing the software for this subaccount on a new or replacement computer.

Recovery Mode Installation Select Recovery Mode Installation if you are installing to perform a restore and if the original software for this subaccount is still installed and active on the original computer.

Re-installation Procedure To perform any of the re-installation tasks, perform the following steps. 1. Click the Backup Monitor shortcut displayed on your desktop.

The Setup screen is displayed.

2. Type username, password, and computer, and then click Validate.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 551 The Test screen is displayed.

3. Click the Test button.

The tests are performed, and the Next button is displayed.

4. Click Next.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 552 The Setup Type screen is displayed.

5. Use the following table to continue.

If you select… Then… Recover Previous Installation Click Next to continue to next step. Move Account to this Computer a. Click Next. The Recover Your File Catalog screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 553 If you select… Then…

b. Click Next to download the catalog. c. After the catalog is downloaded, extracted, and loaded, click Next. Recovery Mode Installation a. Click Next. The Name your recovery mode installation screen is displayed.

b. Name your recovery mode installation, and then click Next.

The Recover Your File Catalog screen is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 554 If you select… Then…

c. Click Next to download the catalog. d. After the catalog is downloaded, extracted, and loaded, click Next.

The Default Settings screen is displayed.

6. Click each option bar to display default settings, and if desired make your changes.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 555 The options are displayed below.

7. When complete, click Next.

The Backup Monitor is displayed.

8. If moving an account or in installing recovery mode, run the restore.

• Select the files, folders, or backup sets you wish to restore from. • To restore the latest versions of the files, select them, and then select the Restore button. • To restore different revisions that have been stored, select the (+) next to each individual file, select the desired revision, and then select the Restore button.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 556 9. Proceed to restore data through the Restore wizard in the portal, making sure to choose the correct installation when prompted.

About Groups Groups can be used to organize all of your different clients’ computers into groupings to which you can apply templates globally rather than one computer at a time. Typical group types or names may include the following:

• Laptops • Desktops • Servers • Exchange Servers • SQL Servers

The default group includes all clients and their computers until you create new groups. After a group is created, existing computers can be clicked and dragged into a desired group. Groups can have templates applied within the Manage tab. New computers can be added to groups upon creation.

Creating a Group To create a group, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the Group View tab, and then click Add Group.

The Add Group dialog appears.

2. Type the name of the group, add a description, and then click Create.

The new group is displayed.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 557 Editing a Group To edit a group, perform the following steps. 1. At the Management Dashboard, click the group name, and then click Add Group.

The Add Group pop-up is displayed.

2. Change the name and or description, and then click Update.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 558 Glossary The following table provides definitions for some of the terms used in this guide for cloud computing restore and backup functions.

Term Definition 4k Sector A 4k sector size rather than the traditional 512-byte sector used on legacy disk drives is larger and allows for higher capacity storage as well as the potential for improved performance. Application-consistent Captures all the data including the data in memory and all transactions in Backup process. Archive Rules Controls the number of revisions stored, by removing unneeded revisions indicated in the rule. When the backup set is run, each rule is applied in the order listed within the set's revision rule list. The standard rules types are: • Disk Usage • Number of Revisions • Disk Usage • Date Range Asynchronous An attribute of a before and after action. If designated for a before action, the action starts at the start of a backup set but may not finish before the backup set begins. If designated for an after action, the backup set may not finish before the action is run. Backup Set A selected set of data and folders that are backed up when run, either manually, or automatically based on an associated schedule. Backup sets can include files and folders, VMware and Hyper-V virtual machines (VMs), an image of one or more physical drives, or SQL and Exchange data. Checkpoint A snapshot of a Hyper-V virtual machine. Differs from a VSS Snapshot. Cloud Archive Data that no longer needs to be accessed on a regular basis is maintained and backed up remotely by a cloud storage service provider. Cloud Application A software application that never is installed on a local machine and always accessed over the Internet. Cloud Provider A company that provides cloud-based platform, infrastructure, application, or storage services to other organizations and/or individuals. Computer ID A unique four-digit code used to keep track of multiple subaccounts that are associated with a single main account. The first computer you install Online Backup Solution.com on has the computer ID 0000. Subsequent subaccounts have the next sequential computer ID of 0001, 0002, and so on. Cluster A group of hosts that are linked for providing high availability. Crash-consistent Backup Captures all the virtual machine's data at the same time.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 559 Term Definition Differencing Disk A virtual hard disk (VHD) that stores changes made to another VHD or to the guest operating system. The purpose of differencing disks is to maintain information about any changes made so changes can be reversed. Differential Backup A type of backup associated with SQL Server, for File and Folder backup sets. After the initial full backup is completed, a differential backup selects only the data that changed since the full backup. FAT . A developed mostly for hard drives. File Catalog A list of all of data, and revisions that are contained within backup set. The catalog is transmitted to the backup servers with every backup. GPT Globally unique identifier (GUID) partition table. A standard for the layout of the partition table on a physical hard disk using globally unique identifiers. Hypervisor A platform that allows multiple operating systems to run on a host computer at the same time. Hyper-V A Microsoft virtualization solution. Formerly known as Windows Server Virtualization, it can create virtual machines on x86-64 systems. Hyper-V Manager The primary GUI for Microsoft’s Hyper-V through which virtual machines are managed. Image-level (volume-level) A process that backs up an entire storage volume. Backup Incremental Backup Backs up only the data changed since the last backup. IntelliBlox A proprietary technology that uploads only the changed blocks of a file. At your next backup, the data is scanned and any changes at the block level are detected; only these changes are uploaded. Local Backup Any backup where the storage medium is kept nearby. Local Storage The on-site destination for Image and Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backups. This location should be directly attached or network storage. The data stored for these backups in local storage is unencrypted and stored in reverse-incremental format. Local Vault Where local copies and local-only data are saved. MBR Master boot record. The first sector on a hard drive occupied by code necessary to start the operating system startup process. MSP Managed Service Provider. Provides delivery and management of a variety of services that include but are not limited to network-based services (online backup), applications, and equipment. NTFS New technology file system. The standard file system of all supported Microsoft operating systems. Object-level Recovery A method of recovery that allows recovery of individual files and folders from an image backup. This option is available for Imaging and Hyper-V Rapid Recovery backups. Quiescing A process of bringing the data on a disk of a physical or virtual computer into a state suitable for backups.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 560 Term Definition Rapid Recovery A recovery option for Hyper-V Rapid Recovery and Imaging that allows a VM to be created and/or run directly from the backup data in local storage. Because this option does not require a network copy it is very fast to complete, especially for the most recent revision of a protected machine. Restore The process of retrieving backed up data. You can restore your data to their original locations, or to a different folder. Revision The state of data at a point of time. Revision Rules See Archive Rules. Snapshot A reproduction of the virtual machine as it was when you took the snapshot, including the state of the data on all the virtual machine’s disks and the virtual machine’s power state (on, off, or suspended). Stray Files Any backed-up files that have been removed from the local machine, the backup set, or specified to be excluded from the backup set. Synchronous An attribute of a Before and After action. If designated for a Before action, the action finishes before the backup set begins. If designated for an After action, the backup set finishes, before the action is run. UNC Uniform Naming Convention. Specifies a well-formed syntax to describe the location of a network resource, such as a shared file, directory, or printer. vCenter Server The management tool used to administer the various available servers in the enterprise. These servers can be ESXi, each tied to a physical server and able to host a number of virtual machines. vCenter Server Database A persistent storage area for maintaining the status of each virtual machine and user that is managed in the vCenter Server environment. Located on the same machine as vCenter Server. vMotion The live migration of VMs across hosts in a cluster without having to power them down. Volume Shadow Copy A copy of a volume (VHD/VHDX file) created by a VSS writer that enables files to be backed up even if they re-opened by another process. VMware ESXi VMware hypervisor installed on bare metal and run on the host computer. VMware vSphere The name of the VMware virtualization system. VMware Virtual Machine An interface that provides access to one or more virtual machines on the Console local host or on a remote host running vCenter Server. VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service. A for capturing and creating snapshots called shadow copies. VSS Snapshot See Volume Shadow Copy.

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 561

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 562 INDEX

Account Search Backup, 441 Cancelling, 534 Backing up, 441 Refining, 534 Editing Backup Sets, 448 Searching, 533 Removing Backup Sets, 451 Active Recovery Backup Data Managing, 330, 389 Deleting, 452 Activity Logs Restore About, 121 Restoring, 455 Account Page, 123 Exchange Mailbox Level Computer Page, 125 Backup, 421 Through the Backup Status Report, 127 Backing up, 423 Archiving Rules, 539 Editing Backup Sets, 429 Advanced Features, 421 Retention Parameters, 540 Known Issues, 422 Setting, 543 Overview, 421 Templates, 541 Removing Backup Sets, 432 Audience, 1 Settings, 423 Backup Backup Data Manual, 32 Deleting, 433 Running, 32 Restore Options, 538 Restoring, 437 Schedules, 545 Executive Summary Report, 87 Backup Agent Software Requirements, 3 Creating a New Template, 89 Backup Monitor, 550 Creating a Once/Immediately Executive Summary Backup Selections Page, 22 Report, 93 Icons, 22 Details, 99 Backup Sets Displaying, 87 Changing Names, 536 Latest Status of Account Activity, 96 Backup Status E-mail Notifications Left Side of Report, 97 Editing, 113 Right Side of Report, 98 Backup Status Report Using a Template, 91 Accessing, 109 Using an Existing Template, 90, 92 Filtering, 109 Files and Folders Logs, 110 Backup, 129 Billing Backing Up, 133 Account Billing, 509 Deleting, 144 Canceling Options, 537 Editing Backup Sets, 140 Custom Backup Installer, 14 Removing Backup Sets, 143 Creating, 15 Backup Data Delete Selections Page, 23 Deleting, 144 Icons, 23 Restore, 149 Error Handling, 33 by Backup Sets, 161 Exchange Information Store by Daily Snapshots, 155

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 563 by Folder Hierarchy, 149 Manage Accounts/Packages Link, 482 Overview, 149 Package Invoice Description, 520 Groups, 557 Package Pricing Creating, 557 Adding a Partner, 481 Editing, 558 Assigning, 493 Home Dashboard Assigning Packages to Existing Accounts, 497 Accessing Logs from the Expanded View, 122 Assigning Packages to New Accounts, 496 Hyper-V Rapid Recovery Assigning Packages to Subpartner Accounts, 493 Backup, 395 Assigning to Partners Deleting, 407 Process, 493 Editing Backup Sets, 403 Creating a Custom Package, 486 Overview, 395 Deactiviating a Customer Billing Plan, 491 Removing Backup Sets, 406 Editing a Subpartner Custom Package, 489 Backup Sets Manage Accounts/Packages Page, 483 Creating, 396 Migrating Existing Accounts from Volume Pricing, 498 Restore, 411 Snapshot Report, 501 Object-level Support for Partners Restoring, 416 Pricing Model, 479 Overview, 411 U2 Plan, 479 Restoring, 412 Page Displays Hyper-V Standard Drilling Down to Specific Volumes, Folders, and Backup, 369 Versions, 27 Delete Expanding and Contracting, 26 Options, 385 Physical Imaging Deleting, 382 Removing Backup Sets, 321 Editing Backup Sets, 378 Physical Imaging Rapid Recovery Overview, 369 Backup, 309 Removing Backup Sets, 381 Backing up, 310 Backup Sets Overview, 309 Creating, 370 Backup Data Restore, 387 Deleting, 323 Backup States of Imported VMs, 388 Editing Backup Sets, 318 Manager Virtual Machines Import Options, 387 Restore, 327 Overview, 387 Bare Metal Recovery Replication, 388 Adding Missing Drivers, 366 Restoring, 390 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as to a Folder, 387 a USB Flash Drive, 357 Manage Account Page an ISO File, 351 Account Billing Plan Information, 519 Running Recovery Media, 361 Manage Packages/Accounts Page Managing, 327 Extra Costs Information, 485 Managing Active Recovery, 328 Viewing Account Billing Plan Details, 484 Object-level Navigating to the Computer Page, 531 Overview, 344 Notifications Page, 17 Restoring, 345 Editing, 19 Production Recovery, 327 Overage Alerts Restoring, 331 Enabling, 50 Sandboxed Test Recovery, 327 Overview, 48 VHD/VHDX File Package Restoring to, 339 Invoice Description, 500 VHD/VHDX File

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 564 Overview, 339 Backup Status, 109 Restore Overview, 327 Executive Summary, 87 Physical Imaging Standard Plan Percentage, 115 Backup, 259 Restore Selections Page, 23 Backing up, 260 Icons, 24 Delete Secondary Catalog, 29 Options, 277 Restoring from, 29 Editing Backup Sets, 270 Software Page, 10 Overview, 259 Editing, 11 Removing Standard Backup Sets, 273 Software Requirements Deleting Revisions, 274 Backup Agent, 3 Hyper-V Virtual Machine Restore SQL Server Overview, 284 Backup, 237 Restore Backing up, 237 Bare Metal Recovery Editing Backup Sets, 246 Adding Missing Drivers, 307 Removing Backup Sets, 249 Downloading the Recovery Media Creator as Backup Data a USB Flash Drive, 298 Deleting, 250 an ISO File, 293 Restore Running Recovery Media, 302 Restoring, 253 via Bare Metal Recovery, 292 Storage Management, 477 Production Recovery, 284 Stray Files, 61 Sandboxed Test Recovery, 284 Adding Preferences Templates, 63 to a Hyper-V Virtual Machine, 284 Administrator Credentials, 81 to VHD/X Files, 279 Applying Templates to an Account, 69 VHD/X Files Changing a Package Plan for an Account with, 77 Overview, 279 Editing Templates, 67 Physical Imaging Standard Rapid Recovery Generating a List of the Largest Stray Files to a Specified Restore Path, 83 via Bare Metal Recovery, 350 Generating a Stray File List Script, 81 Plan Percentage Report, 115 Locally Generating a Stray File List Using .bat File, 85 Pricing Remotely Generating a Stray File List, 84 About Package Pricing, 479 Retention, 61 About Volume Pricing, 477 Scripts, 81 Account Billing Setting Preferences from Computer Page, 73 Assigning a Plan to a Partner, 512 Support, 4 Changing an Account Billing Plan, 513 Contacting, 529 Creating an Account Billing Plan, 509 Issues You Can Check, 529 Deleting an Account Billing Plan, 516 Preparing for, 529 Editing an Account Billing Plan, 514 System Page, 7 Annual Prepay Plan, 503 Editing, 8 Cost and Discount Information, 503 System State Invoice Information, 505 Backup, 459 Partner, 473 Creating, 459 U2 Plan, 479 Editing Backup Sets, 464 Recovery Media Removing Backup Sets, 466 Running, 302, 361 Backup Data Related Documentation, 2 Deleting, 467 Report Restore Account Snapshot, 501, 521 Restoring, 469

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 565 Templates, 35 Overview, 201 Applying Removing Backup Sets, 224 to a Single Computer from the Software Page, 16 Backup Data Applying Template to a Computer Group, 58 Deleting, 225 Applying Template to a Single Computer, 56 Restore, 229 Assigning Email Notification, 45 Overview, 229 Creating Email Notification, 43 Restoring, 229 Creating Software Preferences, 41 VMware Standard Creating System Preferences, 37, 42 Backup, 169 Deleting, 54 Backing up, 170 Editing, 52 Delete Preferences, 36 Options, 185 View All Selected Files and Folders Items Pop-up Editing Backup Sets, 179 Description, 129 Overview, 169 VMware Clusters, 549 Removing Backup Sets, 181 VMware QuickSpin Backup Data Backup, 201 Deleting, 182 Backing up, 201 Recovery Types, 187, 229 Editing Backup Sets, 218 Restore, 187 Changing a VMware QuickSpin Destination Host, Overview, 187 220 Restoring, 187 Changing a VMware QuickSpin Incremental vSphere API Version Storage Location, 222 Configuration, 169 Licensing, 201

This document constitutes proprietary and confidential information of Barracuda Networks, Inc. This document may not be disclosed, used or duplicated, in whole or in part without the prior written consent of Barracuda Networks, Inc. 566